Fiction Writing Made Easy | Top Creative Writing Podcast for Fiction Writers & Writing Tips

What does line editing actually involve, and is your manuscript ready for it? Here's everything you need to know. Line editing is a stage in the revision process that can feel really confusing, especially if you're not sure how it's different from developmental editing, copy editing, or proofreading. So in today's episode, I brought in two people who know this topic inside and out. Andrea and Michelle are the managing partners of Two Birds Author Services, and they've been editing fiction together since 2018. They've worked with many writers from my own community, and I've seen firsthand how their feedback helps authors not only polish their current manuscript but grow as writers for every book that comes after. They break down exactly what line editing is, how to know when your manuscript is ready for it, what to look for when you're searching for an editor, and what the process typically looks like from start to finish.  We also get into the most common sentence-level mistakes they see—things like clarity issues, weak word choices, and inconsistent rhythm—and how you can start addressing those in your own writing before you even hire an editor. Here's what we cover: [04:30] What line editing actually is, why it's not proofreading, and exactly where it fits in the novel revision process. [07:07] How to find a line editor who's the right fit for your book and why always requesting a free sample edit before you commit is so important. [17:05] Worried a line editor will change your voice? Here's how Andrea and Michelle make sure every suggestion stays true to your style. [21:41] The three most common mistakes line editors catch in fiction manuscripts and how to start fixing them in your own writing. [28:42] How sentence length and structure control your novel's pacing and why this matters more than most writers realize. Whether you're getting ready to hand off your manuscript or just curious about what happens at this stage of the process, this episode will give you the clarity and confidence you need. And if this episode got you thinking about where your manuscript actually stands before it gets to a line editor, my 5-Day Revision Accelerator is the perfect next step. In just five days, you'll learn how to evaluate your manuscript, identify what's not working at the big-picture level, and walk away with a clear revision plan—so that when you do hand your manuscript off to a line editor, it's actually ready for that level of work. Sign up using the link below. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Sign Up For The Revision AcceleratorHot Words Checklist Two Birds Author Services Website⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

You finished your first draft. And for a minute, it felt amazing. But then you open your manuscript to revise, and suddenly everything feels unclear. Where do you start? What do you fix first? And how do you know if anything you're changing is actually making your story better? And at a certain point, it starts to feel like the problem might be your draft. But most of the time, it's not. It's the way you're approaching revision. That's why in this episode, I'm walking you through the five most common revision mistakes I see, because chances are, at least one of them will tell you exactly where your revision is going sideways. You'll hear me talk about things like: [02:08] Why starting revisions without a clear target leads to endless changes, second-guessing, and a draft that never improves. [06:52] The subtle mindset shift that separates drafting from revising and why staying in the wrong mode makes your story harder to evaluate. [09:37] What most writers skip before they start editing, and how this leads to weeks of changes that don't actually fix anything. [12:06] Why the order you revise matters more than how much time you put in, and the specific sequence that gets your revision on track. [14:21] The tricky truth about feedback, when it helps, when it hurts, and why getting it too soon can leave you more stuck than before. If you've been staring at your draft not knowing where to begin, or rewriting the same chapters, second-guessing every revision decision, or feeling like your draft is getting worse instead of better, this episode is for you. And if you want help figuring out what your story needs and how to approach revision with a clear plan, my 5-Day Revision Accelerator is designed to do exactly that. In just five days, you'll learn how to evaluate your manuscript, identify what's not working, and create a clear revision plan so you're not stuck second-guessing every change. Sign up using the link below. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Sign Up For The Revision Accelerator⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover why the answer to hiring a book editor before querying isn’t a simple yes or no—and how to make the right call for your manuscript. If you've finished your draft and you're thinking about querying literary agents, you've probably seen this advice: don't hire an editor before you query. And while that's not wrong, it's also not the full picture. Because the real issue isn't whether you hire an editor. It's whether you're solving the right problem in your manuscript. In this episode, I'm breaking down what industry professionals actually mean when they give this advice, the different types of editing (and what each one really does), and how to tell whether your story is truly ready to query (or still needs deeper development). We'll also talk about why so many writers get stuck in revision, what it looks like to revise with a clear plan instead of guessing, and how to tell if you're improving your sentences… or fixing your story. This is what I talk about: [00:47] Why the advice around hiring a book editor before querying is often misunderstood, and how it leads writers to focus on the wrong kind of editing. [02:33] What literary agents are really evaluating when they read your manuscript—and why polished prose can't fix a story that isn't working. [03:58] The difference between developmental editing, line editing, and copy editing, and why only one of these directly impacts whether your story works. [07:45] The common revision trap writers fall into when they can't identify the real problem in their manuscript and how it leads to endless, unfocused rewriting. [09:15] The 3 key questions to ask yourself before querying so you can tell whether your manuscript needs more polish—or deeper story development. If you've been stuck wondering whether to hire a book editor or keep revising on your own, I hope this episode gives you the clarity you need to make a smarter decision. And if you want help diagnosing what's actually not working in your manuscript, my 5-Day Revision Accelerator is designed to do exactly that. In just five days, you'll identify your manuscript's biggest problems, prioritize what to fix, and walk away with a clear revision plan—so you can go into querying knowing your story is ready (not just hoping it is). Sign up using the link below. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Sign Up For The Revision Accelerator⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Are you revising the same chapters over and over, but nothing you change is actually fixing the problem? Most writers go straight to the prose when their story isn't working. They tighten sentences, swap out words, and reread the same chapter over and over. And still, something feels off. But most first-draft problems don't occur at the sentence level. They occur at the story level. In this episode, I share the 10 writing mistakes I see most often in manuscripts. Plus, I’ll give you the diagnostic question for each one so you can pinpoint what's holding your story back and know exactly where to start revising. Here’s what I talk about: [01:44] Why some stories start too early and how this common first draft mistake makes readers feel like the real story hasn't begun. [05:59] The one question every strong story is built around, and how to tell if your manuscript is missing it. [07:49] Why stories start to feel aimless when the protagonist doesn't have a clear, specific goal driving the action. [12:10] Why tension collapses when your antagonist is weak or underdeveloped, even when they're present on the page. [16:23] Why so many novels lose momentum in the middle, and the structural issue that usually causes it. If you recognize some of these issues in your own manuscript, don't panic. Almost every first draft has a few of these problems. This is a normal part of the writing process. Revision isn't just about making your sentences prettier; it's about strengthening the foundation of your story so readers can experience the tension, emotion, and meaning you intended. Once you clearly see what's happening in your manuscript, you can start fixing the right things in the right order. That's exactly what The Revision Accelerator is designed to help you do. In just five days, you'll diagnose what's holding your story back, prioritize what to fix first, and walk away with a clear revision plan without the overwhelm. Click here to join us. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Sign Up For The Revision Accelerator to diagnose what's actually holding your story back.⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

She wrote her first novel in 15-minute increments—in drive-through lines, at the dance studio, at swim lessons—while raising two kids and walking through one of the hardest seasons of her family's life. And she finished her book.  That's Jackie Henley's (pen name J.J. Henley) story, and I wanted to bring her onto the podcast because I know so many of you feel like life keeps getting in the way of writing your novel. Jackie's story is proof that it doesn't have to. Jackie is a mom of two, a former teacher, and a long-time Bookstagrammer who spent years reviewing other people's stories before she finally decided to write one of her own. She went through my Notes to Novel program and finished her debut romantic suspense, writing most of it in small pockets of time between school drop-offs, swim lessons, and drive-through lines. In this episode, she walks us through the whole journey, and I know you're going to find it incredibly inspiring. Here's what we talk about: [05:58] How beta reading a friend's novel made Jackie realize she could actually write her own and why seeing a story in its messy state changed her mindset entirely.  [15:14] Why Jackie resisted calling her book a thriller with a romance subplot and the ‘aha’ moment that completely changed her mind on this.  [23:07] How having a scene-by-scene outline made her 15-minute writing sessions low-stress, productive, and effective.  [28:13] What happened when her son stopped sleeping, her writing windows disappeared, and her family was navigating one of the hardest seasons of their lives (and how she kept going anyway). [38:30] Her honest take on self-publishing vs. traditional publishing, and what shifted her perspective entirely. If you've been waiting for the right time to write your book, or if life keeps getting in the way and you're not sure you have enough time to actually finish, this one's for you. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Join The Notes To Novel WaitlistJ.J. Henley / Jackie Henley on Instagram⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn how to market your book in a way that aligns with your values, builds genuine reader connections, and feels sustainable instead of draining. Book Marketing. These two words make most writers want to close their laptops and hide forever. But what if it didn't have to feel that way? In this episode, I'm joined by award-winning science fiction and fantasy novelist and certified creativity coach Beth Barany to talk about what she calls heart-centered book marketing: A values-driven approach to promoting your story that actually feels aligned with who you are. We break down how to market your book without feeling salesy, how to identify the core values behind your writing, and how to build meaningful reader relationships that energize you rather than drain you. Here’s what we cover: [04:35] What heart-centered book marketing actually means and how it differs from the traditional advice you'll find everywhere online. [07:57] Why chasing other people's book marketing strategies leads to burnout, and a key question to ask yourself before adopting any tactic. [11:01] How to uncover your core values as a writer and why your novel characters can actually help you do it. [15:47] A real example of how Beth uses her values to choose her book marketing platforms, including a creative Reddit strategy she's currently exploring. [22:18] Why you should ditch the "buy my book" approach and use your story's tropes to invite the right readers in instead. [24:36] Why fangirling authors you love is the easiest free marketing strategy and how it can lead to real collaborations and unexpected opportunities. Whether you're pre-launch, mid-series, or just exhausted by marketing advice that doesn't feel like you, this episode will give you a refreshing, permission-giving framework to promote your book in a way that's sustainable, authentic, and actually kind of fun. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Beth Barany WebsiteTrust Your Creative Heart Roadmap Workbook Beth Barany Instagram Beth Barany Podcast ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

You wrote a prologue for your novel. But now you're wondering if you really need it. Here are three honest signs your story might actually be stronger without one. Writing a prologue feels like the right move until you're three drafts in and still not sure if it's actually helping your story or just sitting there, taking up space at the front of your book. And the tricky part is that it's not always easy to tell. Because sometimes the prologue isn't the problem. And sometimes it really is. That's exactly what we're digging into in today's episode: I'm walking you through three signs that your prologue might not be doing what you think it is (and what to do instead) so your opening still grabs readers and pulls them straight into your story. You'll hear me talk about things like: [02:59] How prologues that deliver backstory or world-building can weaken your opening scene—and what readers actually need instead. [06:10] Why a flash-forward prologue can release tension before it has time to build (and how to tell if your plot twist is losing impact). [09:31] The subtle way a prologue can mask a weak first chapter—especially if your story starts too early. [11:17] A simple reading test to determine whether your prologue is structurally necessary—or just informational. [14:33] What it really means for a prologue to “earn its place” in your novel—and the mindset shift that makes the decision easier. If you've been going back and forth on your prologue, this episode will give you the clarity to finally make the call. Because when your opening is working (like really working), you'll feel it. And so will your readers. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. #215 - How to Write a Prologue Readers Won't Skip (& When to Start at Chapter One Instead)Ep. #190 - Novel Editing: 10 Steps to Editing Your First DraftTake the Author Success Quiz⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Is AI here to replace novelists, steal ideas, or ruin copyright forever? Let’s separate fear from facts. AI and creative writing are among the most debated topics in the publishing industry right now. Some writers are excited, while others are feeling cautious. And many are wondering what's actually true about AI, copyright law, idea theft, and querying agents. In this episode, I sit down with award-winning novelist and technologist Ana Del Valle to unpack what AI really means for fiction writers. Ana is the founder of the AI Creative Writing Academy and host of The Novelist Studio podcast, bringing both tech expertise and creative insight to this conversation. Here’s what we cover: [02:54] How Ana’s background in tech and fiction collided when ChatGPT launched, and why she believes we're entering a new golden era of literature. [05:56] The crucial difference between AI Assist and AI Generation, and why this distinction protects your voice, ownership, and copyright. [11:55] The truth about whether ChatGPT can steal your story ideas, plus what those scary AI lawsuits actually mean for writers. [14:38] How U.S. copyright law handles AI-created work, and why heavily editing AI-generated drafts can put writers in murky territory. [21:01] Whether you need to disclose AI use when querying agents, and how traditional publishing is already integrating AI behind the scenes. Whether you're AI-curious or AI-cautious, this episode will give you the clarity you need to make informed decisions about using AI in your writing process. Tune in now. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ana Del Valle WebsiteChatGPT for creative writers e-bookAna del Valle YouTube Channel ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn the 5 key elements every scene needs to move your story forward and keep readers turning pages. Scene structure doesn't have to be complicated. Sure, there are many methods out there, such as Story Grid's Five Commandments, Dwight Swain's Scene and Sequel, and James Scott Bell's LOCK system. And if you've tried learning from more than one method, it can feel like everyone's teaching something completely different.  But the truth is, they're actually not. Because when you strip away the terminology, they're all pointing to the same core ideas. In this episode, I'm breaking down those five core elements—the ones hiding inside every scene structure method you've ever heard of. Once you understand what they are, you can stop guessing and start writing scenes that actually move your story forward. You’ll hear me talk about things like: [05:18] Why your character needs a clear goal before the scene begins, and why it's so hard to fix later if you skip it. [07:01] What separates real conflict from obstacles, and why your scene antagonist needs their own agenda. [10:41] What actually creates a turning point in a scene, and why piling on tension alone won't get you there. [12:39] Why your POV character must be the one making a high-stakes decision, and the reason reader investment dips when someone else chooses for them.  [15:55] The consequences that follow your character's decision and how their specific reaction creates momentum in your next scene. By the end of this episode, you'll have a clear framework you can apply to any scene you're writing or revising. And you can grab my free scene-structure guide from the links below to start applying it right away. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to download the Scene Guide to write scenes that keep your readers glued to the page.⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Master the 8 Habits of Mind to build a sustainable, joyful writing practice that helps you finish your book without burnout or self-sabotage. Building a writing practice shouldn't feel like pushing a boulder uphill. But so many writers get stuck dealing with imposter syndrome, fighting writer's block, and wondering why their routine keeps falling apart. That’s why in this episode, I sit down with Dr. Bailey Lang, a book coach, editor, and writer who specializes in helping authors build sustainable writing practices that actually work with their lives. With a background in Rhetoric and Writing Studies, she has spent years researching how writers get work done and what gets in the way. Today, Dr. Bailey Lang shares the 8 Habits of Mind: curiosity, openness, engagement, creativity, persistence, responsibility, flexibility, and metacognition. These habits extend beyond managing impostor syndrome. They help you proactively create a writing practice that actually sticks. Here's what we cover: [06:49] How openness helps you experiment with your writing practice and find inspiration in unexpected places without forcing yourself into routines that don't fit. [09:35] Why persistence is the habit Dr. Bailey Lang works on most with writers, and how to stick with your story during the messy middle when everything feels hard. [13:31] The surprising resistance writers have to flexibility, and why rigid writing streaks might be sabotaging your practice instead of helping it. [17:10] How to actually implement these writing habits without overwhelming yourself—starting with one habit, tracking it, and running small experiments. [26:50] Why stories are the truest form of magic, and how these habits give you permission to tell the story you're meant to write. Whether you're stuck, burnt out, or your writing practice isn't working the way you want it to, this episode will help you build a foundation that makes finishing your book feel possible and even enjoyable. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Dr. Bailey Lang WebsiteFree email series: Learn the 8 habits of mind that can unlock your creativity and help you take your book from draft to done.5 Writing Roadblocks Keeping You Stuck & How to Break Through ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Master the art of writing natural-sounding dialogue by learning how to remove unnecessary lines, shape distinct character voices, and write conversations that feel purposeful on the page. If your dialogue feels stiff or flat, even when the conversation itself seems clear, there’s usually a specific reason for that. And it's not because you're bad at dialogue. In most cases, it comes down to a few subtle craft issues that quietly pull readers out of the scene, even when the conversation itself seems realistic. That's why in this episode, I’m breaking down five secrets that help your dialogue sound natural without copying real-life speech word-for-word.  You'll learn how to spot what's weakening your dialogue and how to revise conversations so they're clearer, tighter, and more effective on the page. In the episode, you’ll hear me talk about things like: [02:02] The easy-to-miss dialogue habit that feels realistic but quietly drains tension, and why cutting it can immediately sharpen a scene. [03:56] Why natural-sounding dialogue has little to do with real conversation, and what readers are actually expecting when they read a scene. [06:06] The subtle reason conversations can feel like talking heads and how to anchor dialogue so scenes feel present and alive. [09:03] A simple test that reveals whether your characters truly sound different or if they're all sharing the same voice on the page. [11:09] What powerful dialogue rarely says outright, and how what's left unsaid keeps readers leaning in. If dialogue has been one of those craft areas that feels slippery or hard to pin down, this episode will help you see it more clearly and revise with confidence instead of guesswork. Enjoy the episode! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: 10 Steps To Editing Your NovelTake Author Success Quiz⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover the five craft techniques that make morally gray characters impossible to put down—so you can write complex, compelling figures readers will argue about, defend, and love despite everything. Morally gray characters are some of the most memorable in fiction. Think Cersei Lannister (Game of Thrones), Kaz Brekker (Six of Crows), Severus Snape (Harry Potter), or Amy Dunne (Gone Girl). These are the characters readers can't stop thinking about long after the book is finished. But what actually makes them work? It's not randomness or shock value. And it's definitely not just "bad person with a sad backstory." It's intentional craft. In this episode, I'm breaking down five tips for writing morally gray characters that feel authentic, nuanced, and impossible to look away from—whether you're writing fantasy, thriller, romance, or any other genre. You'll hear me talk about things like: [02:45] What "morally gray" actually means and how it differs from the antihero—so you can stop conflating the two and start building true moral complexity.[04:25] How to create a character worldview that justifies their actions, including the role of backstory, goals, and the personal code that reveals what they truly value.[07:51] Why lose-lose dilemmas are essential for morally gray characters—and how to construct impossible choices that test your character and keep readers emotionally invested.[10:05] The importance of letting your character make questionable choices with real consequences—and why softening the gray undermines everything you've built.[12:50] How to keep readers invested in a morally gray character even when their choices are hard to stomach (hint: it's not about making them likable).[14:54] The redemption arc trap most writers fall into—and why the best morally gray characters don't get "fixed" by the end of the story.If you've ever struggled to write a complex antagonist, a flawed protagonist, or a love interest readers can't quite root for but can't look away from either, this episode will give you the tools to craft morally gray characters with confidence and intention. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Learn more about Notes To NovelTake Author Success Quiz⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover how five Notes to Novel students stopped guessing their way through drafts by planning and outlining their stories with a clear structure. In this Student Spotlight episode, you’ll hear from five Notes to Novel students who entered the program actively writing, but couldn’t see why their drafts weren't working or how to fix them. Each case study shows what changed once these writers had a clear process to follow—one that helped them turn their ideas into a story that works. You’ll hear how confusion turned into clear decision-making, how outlines became practical tools for guiding the draft, and how stalled stories started moving forward once these writers understood what their stories actually needed. Here’s what we cover:  [03:00] How Maggie moved from self-doubt and “am I even a real writer?” thinking to confidently outlining a rich fantasy novel with a clear antagonist and story direction. [07:00] How John spiced up the middle of his story by strengthening stakes, side characters, and theme, and learned to treat his outline as a flexible, living document. [12:00] How Insa rebuilt her women’s fiction novel by clarifying genre, layering conflict into every scene, and writing over 15,000 words in just days after finishing Notes To Novel.  [17:45] How Emily broke out of over-learning mode, found the missing middle of her story, and gained clarity on conflict, antagonists, and scene-level momentum. [23:45] How Samantha uncovered the core misunderstanding holding her romance novels back and finally found a clear path to revising and finishing her draft. Ready to finish your novel without second-guessing every word, sentence, or scene? Join Maggie, John, Insa, Emily, and Samantha, along with hundreds of other writers who've discovered that drafting doesn't have to feel hard. You just need the right roadmap. Get on the waitlist for the next open enrollment of my Notes to Novel course and get my complete, step-by-step framework for writing a story that works. Doors open January 22nd until January 28th. Don't miss your chance to turn your ideas into a finished, easy-to-edit first draft you love.  🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Learn more about Notes to NovelMaggie Rose InstagramEmily S. Instagram⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Five writers. Five different starting points. One clear framework that turned stalled first drafts into steady progress. In today’s episode, I’m sharing real stories from five Notes to Novel students who were stuck in very different ways but wanted the same thing: clarity and forward momentum on their novels. You'll hear from writers who were buried in craft books, sitting on drafts that didn’t work, rewriting in circles, or unsure if they were “too far along” or “not far enough” to get help.  What changed was simple: they stopped guessing and started working with a clear framework they could trust. If you’ve been feeling stuck, overwhelmed, or unsure what your next step should be, there’s a good chance you’ll hear your own experience reflected in this episode. Here’s what we cover: [04:01] How Carolyn went from a shaky first draft structure to confidently plotting a new novel with clear scenes, stakes, and forward momentum. [07:42] How Hazel broke free from information overload and rebuilt her outline from the ground up with a clear theme and scene-level direction. [11:20] How Josephine stopped over-learning, trusted one proven process, and moved from endless brainstorming to fast drafting with confidence. [17:03] How Warren, a self-published author, fixed the middle of his story using key scenes, antagonists, and pinch points. [19:49] How Rachel turned 130,000 words into a clear, pitchable 85,000-word story that she’s proud of and can explain with confidence. Ready to finish your novel without second-guessing every word, sentence, or scene? Join Carolyn, Hazel, Josephine, Warren, Rachel, and hundreds of other writers who've discovered that drafting doesn't have to feel hard. You just need the right roadmap. Get on the waitlist for the next open enrollment of my Notes to Novel course and get my complete, step-by-step framework for writing a story that works. Doors open January 22nd until January 28th. Don't miss your chance to turn your ideas into a finished, easy-to-edit first draft you love.  🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Join The Notes To Novel WaitlistCarolyn Freudenthal WebsiteHazel Dawson InstagramJosephine Noble WebsiteWarren Dunn Website⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover how three Notes to Novel™ students stopped guessing their way through drafting and built steady, sustainable momentum toward a finished first draft. In this short bonus episode, I'm sharing three real case studies from past Notes to Novel students who were all stuck in different ways but wanted the same thing: to finish their first draft.  You’ll hear how each writer went from stalled, inconsistent drafting to steady momentum once they stopped overthinking and started working with a clear story structure and scene-level direction.  These aren't theories or abstract tips. They're real examples of what changes when writers have a proven process that they can trust. Here’s what we cover: [03:56] How Lindsay went from 25,000 words in six months to a 100,000-word draft after finding the missing piece that finally made her story flow. [08:47] Why Alison kept putting finished drafts in a drawer, and the realization that finally explained why her scenes weren't working. [10:40] How Sharon, a first-time novelist, set a realistic goal of 6,000 words per week and finished her entire first draft two days ahead of schedule, stress-free.  [13:18] The drafting strategy that keeps you moving forward with confidence instead of second-guessing every scene you write Ready to stop stalling and start finishing? Join Lindsay, Alison, Sharon, and hundreds of other writers who've discovered that drafting doesn't have to feel like a slog. You just need the right roadmap.  Get on the waitlist for the next open enrollment of my Notes to Novel course and get my complete, step-by-step framework for writing a story that works. Doors open January 22nd—don't miss your chance to turn your ideas into a finished draft you're proud of. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get on the Notes To Novel Waitlist⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

If you've been working on your novel for months—or even years—without making real progress, this episode will help you understand why. Maybe you've started multiple books but never finished one. Maybe you sit down to write and have no idea what to work on. Or maybe you keep rewriting the same chapters over and over, hoping clarity will finally come. Here's what I want you to know: this isn't a talent problem or a motivation problem. It's a process problem—and process problems are fixable. In this episode, I'm walking you through five signs your writing process is broken, what's really causing all of them, and the one fix that will help you finish your novel. This is what I talk about: [02:13] Why you keep abandoning novels around the 20-30k word mark—and what's really happening when a new idea feels easier than finishing your current draft. [04:30] The real reason you sit down to write and don't know what to work on, even when you've protected the time and eliminated distractions. [06:53] How perfectionism disguises itself as productivity—and why rewriting the same chapters keeps you stuck instead of moving your draft forward. [10:24] The difference between having a story idea and having a story that can support a full-length novel (hint: it comes down to knowing your ending). [12:39] The one root cause behind all five signs—and how building a solid story foundation before you draft changes everything. If you recognized yourself in any of these signs, stop blaming yourself and start looking at your foundation. The fix isn't more willpower or a better story idea—it's building a solid foundation before you draft. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get on the Notes to Novel waitlist⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn how a self-proclaimed perfectionist wrote a 114,000-word first draft in just 88 days—while working full-time and without finding more hours in the day. Poornika didn't have endless hours to write. She had two hours a night after work, some longer weekend sessions, and a chronic illness that sometimes forced her to step away completely. And yet, she finished her novel in 88 days—and went on to sign with her dream agent. In today's episode, I'm sitting down with Poornika Kakkanaiah, a former Notes to Novel student, to talk about what made that kind of progress possible. Spoiler: it wasn't discipline or motivation. It was having a clear roadmap that eliminated decision fatigue and made every writing session count. Poornika shares how she broke free from months of research paralysis, the outlining approach that gave her a scene-by-scene outline she trusted, and why setting a cut-bait date changed everything. If you've ever felt like your day job makes finishing a novel impossible, this conversation will show you otherwise. Here's what we cover: [07:51] Why combining multiple plotting methods created confusion instead of clarity, and what she did instead [10:45] How Poornika built a scene-by-scene outline she trusted—and the cut-bait date that forced her to start drafting [11:27] The three strategies that made it possible to write 114,000 words in 88 days while working full-time [37:50] What it was like to get "the call"—and why signing with her dream agent felt like everything finally clicking into place [40:06] The truth about getting multiple offers of representation (and why one great fit is all you need) If you're craving proof that it's possible to write a novel alongside a demanding job and real-life challenges, Poornika's story will show you exactly what that can look like. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Poornika Kakkanaiah on TikTokPoornika Kakkanaiah on InstagramGet on the Notes To Novel Waitlist ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

If you've been trying to write a novel with a full-time job, family, and everything else life throws at you, this episode is for you. Maybe you squeeze writing into nights or weekends. You may start strong, then lose momentum when things don't go as planned. Or perhaps you keep telling yourself you’ll take your writing seriously when you have more time. In this episode, I’m sharing five practical shifts to prioritize your novel and start making steady progress, even when your time is limited and unpredictable.  These shifts help you simplify your writing process, reduce decision fatigue, and use the time you already have more effectively, so your draft keeps moving forward instead of wobbling every time life gets busy. You’ll hear me talk about things like: [02:40] Why jumping between plotting methods can quietly stall your draft, and what really helps move the needle.  [04:30] How indecision eats up your writing time before you even start, and what to clarify before you sit down to write. [06:33] The mistake most busy writers make when setting goals, and how to choose targets that actually fit your real life [08:44] How to spot hidden pockets of writing time and why you need to protect them before your brain talks you out of it. [10:50] Why isolation kills momentum, and how the right support system keeps you writing when motivation disappears. [13:01] BONUS: Two real examples of busy writers who used the same approach, finished their drafts, and signed with agents. And so much more… You can finish your novel with a full, busy life. The time is already there. You just need a better plan. Listen in, choose one tip to try this week, and keep your first draft moving forward without waiting for perfect conditions. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Sign up for the Writer Breakthrough BootcampGet on the Notes to Novel Waitlist⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

The best writing advice sticks because it changes how you approach the page. In this special year-end episode, I’m counting down the top 10 most impactful writing tips from Fiction Writing Made Easy in 2025, pulled from this year's most listened-to episodes. These are the lessons writers kept coming back to. The ones that helped them stop second-guessing, get unstuck in the middle, and finally make real progress on their drafts.  In the episode, you’ll hear me talk about things like: [07:30] Why perfectionism during drafting slows everything down, and what to do instead so you can keep moving forward. [15:30] Why learning to write strong, focused scenes first makes plot structure clearer and helps your novel come together faster. [18:30] How narrative drive works, why disconnected scenes stall your story, and the simple fix that creates clear cause-and-effect momentum. [28:00] The real reason writers struggle to finish, and why process matters just as much as craft and mindset. [31:00] Why following one complete writing method beats trying to combine multiple approaches, and how too much advice creates paralysis. And so much more… So grab your notebook, settle in, and let’s celebrate the writing advice that helped so many writers move closer to finishing their novel in 2025. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to view the episode page with all the links.Get on the Notes to Novel waitlist!⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn how a busy parent finished a novel by following a clear roadmap that made it possible to pause, return, and keep moving forward. Between raising four kids, navigating pregnancy and newborn life, and juggling everything that comes with being a busy parent, Madi didn't exactly have ideal writing conditions. And yet, she finished her novel. In today’s episode, I’m sitting down with Madi, a former Notes to Novel student, to talk about what it actually looked like to write a book in the middle of real life. She didn’t have unlimited time or perfect routines. What she had was a clear plan, realistic expectations, and a way to keep moving forward even when progress felt slow. Madi shares the mindset shifts that helped her stop waiting for the right time, how outlining gave her momentum instead of boxing her in, and why having a process made it possible to pause without quitting when life demanded her attention. If you’ve ever wanted to write and finish your novel but feel too busy right now, this conversation is for you. Here’s what we cover: [05:15] The mindset shift that helped Madi stop treating her novel like a hobby and start making real progress toward a finished draft [09:00] How outlining gave Madi clarity and confidence without killing creativity or locking her into a rigid plot structure [07:15] What writing a novel looked like during pregnancy, newborn life, and four kids—plus the simple routine that kept her moving forward [14:50] The step-by-step editing process that turned Madi's first draft into a contest finalist manuscript without burnout [24:15] How Madi went from querying literary agents to landing her dream agent at a top Christian Fiction agency If you're craving proof that it's possible to write a novel alongside a full, busy life, Madi's story will show you exactly what that can look like. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Madi Unruh Instagram Get on the Notes To Novel Waitlist ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

What if the reason you haven't started writing your novel has nothing to do with how much you know? “I’m not ready yet” is one of the most common things I hear from writers. And on the surface, it makes sense. You want to feel prepared before starting something as big as writing a novel. But not feeling ready usually has very little to do with knowledge. More often, the root cause is a lack of clarity.  In this bonus episode, I’m sharing stories from three writers who spent months, and even years, stuck at the starting line because they didn't know how to move from idea to writing.  You’ll hear about Tiara, who loved writing short stories but froze when she tried to write a novel. Jennifer, who dreamed about her YA fantasy for years but felt she needed more credentials before she could begin. And Sheila, a doctor and teacher who had read the books, taken the courses, and still couldn't put it all together. None of them suddenly became more qualified. What changed was their process. In this episode, you'll learn: [04:00] How a short story writer overcame her fear of full-length novel projects by shifting her mindset around perfectionism and learning to trust a step-by-step approach. [06:15] Why one aspiring author spent years frozen at chapter one and how a simple scene-by-scene roadmap helped her go from stuck to a complete first draft in just 90 days. [08:30] How one writer learned to use genre to map out her story’s key scenes—and why this finally made everything click for her after bouncing between over-planning and under-planning for years. If you’ve been telling yourself you're not ready, this episode will help you rethink that. And if you want a clear, step-by-step path to help you finally start and finish your novel, you can get on the waitlist for the next round of Notes to Novel. Doors open January 22. Your story doesn't need more prep work. It needs one clear direction. And I'll help you do that. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get on the Notes to Novel waitlistTiara Ito on InstagramSheila Holmes on Instagram⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Unlock the clarity you need to write smoothly, avoid constant restarts, and finish a stronger first draft in less time. If you've ever tried to draft quickly and ended up with pages that feel unsalvageable, this episode will help you understand why that happens and what to do instead.  You'll learn what makes fast drafting possible, how clarity speeds up your process, and why a little prep work often saves months of rewriting. You'll also hear how my writing students used this approach to finish their drafts with a lot less overwhelm.  This is what I talk about: [02:25] Why following common first-draft advice leads to writing that feels impossible to fix, and how this one shift saves months of frustration. [03:50] The deeper reason you feel slow and stuck while drafting, even when you're writing regularly, and why fixing it builds intentional forward momentum. [06:45] The story foundations most writers skip and how having them in place keeps you from second-guessing or rewriting the same chapters. [08:50] How a simple, flexible roadmap gives you clarity, confidence, and momentum so you stop wandering through your first draft and start moving forward. [09:25] What writing feels like when you’re no longer guessing and how this clarity helps you finish a stronger first draft. Fast and good don't have to compete. With the proper prep work, you can draft briskly and end up with a story that works from beginning to end. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get on the Notes to Novel waitlist!Take The Author Success Blueprint Quiz 5 Writing Roadblocks Keeping You Stuck & How to Break Through⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover why “I’m not ready yet” is a fear-driven mindset and learn how to take small, confident steps that move your novel forward. So many writers get trapped in the feeling that they need more time, more research, or more clarity before they can truly start their first draft. And on the surface, that sounds reasonable. But most of the time, “I’m not ready yet” is a sign that you're scared to make the wrong choice, afraid to write something imperfect, or petrified you won't live up to your idea. In today’s episode, I want to help you understand what's really underneath the “I’m not ready” feeling, how to recognize when planning has quietly turned into procrastination, and how small, low-pressure experiments can help you build momentum right now. My goal is to help you shift out of waiting mode and into action so your story can finally start taking shape. This is what I talk about: [02:30] The hidden fear driving “I'm not ready yet” and why it shows up for even the most motivated writers. [03:15] How research becomes a safety blanket, and the mindset shift that moves you from learner to creator. [04:45] The real reason clarity doesn’t arrive before you start writing and how drafting gives you the answers you’re looking for. [07:45] Simple “safe to fail” experiments that lower the stakes and help you build confidence on the page [09:35] How to tell whether you actually need more foundation work or you're using prep to avoid making decisions. You don't need to feel ready to start writing your novel. You just need permission to begin, and that confidence can come from you today. Tune in and take the very first step toward finishing your first draft. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get on the Notes to Novel waitlist!Take The Author Success Blueprint Quiz 5 Writing Roadblocks Keeping You Stuck & How to Break Through⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover the mindset shifts to break out of analysis paralysis, choose progress over perfection, and build your novel layer by layer until it's complete. Feeling stuck writing your novel? You're not alone. Most writers think they're struggling because they don't have enough time, talent, or discipline. But more often than not, the real issue is actually mindset. In fact, it's the root cause of stuckness: rewriting the same chapters, second-guessing every decision, or trying to fix everything at once. In this episode, I’m sharing three mindset shifts that'll ease the pressure you're putting on yourself, help you get clarity on your draft, and write forward instead of sideways. You will hear me talk about things like: [03:15] Why getting stuck on the first few chapters is more about how you're thinking than how you're writing, and what to pay attention to instead. [06:45] How preparing, planning, and researching can quietly stall your first draft, and the moment you know it's time to switch into writing mode. [12:05] The reason drafting feels overwhelming when you try to fix everything at once, and the reframe that makes finishing your story feel doable. If you've been feeling pressure to get everything right before you can move forward, these shifts will help you see your draft in a much clearer and more manageable way.  Your story doesn’t need perfection to grow; it's allowed to be messy while you figure things out. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get on the Notes to Novel waitlist!Take The Author Success Blueprint Quiz 5 Writing Roadblocks Keeping You Stuck & How to Break Through⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover five practical line editing strategies that sharpen your prose, strengthen emotional clarity, and make each sentence more purposeful on the page. Line editing can feel intimidating, especially if you're not sure where to begin or how to make meaningful improvements at the sentence level. And if you've ever tried refining lines before your scenes are clear and working, you know how frustrating the process can be. In today’s episode, I’m joined by three brilliant book coaches and editors: Karyn Fischer, Alice Sudlow, and Julie Artz, who work with writers every day to help them strengthen their line-level craft. Along with their best tips, I’m also sharing two of my own favorite strategies so you can approach line editing without feeling overwhelmed or unsure of where to start. Here's what we talk about:  [03:00] Learn how dynamic verbs instantly energize your prose and why swapping out static wording is one of the fastest line editing wins. [07:14] See how a simple clarity–flow–refinement order keeps your line edits focused and prevents the overwhelm that stops many writers in revision. [11:40] Learn why understanding the true purpose of your scenes helps you make clearer sentence-level decisions. [15:41] Explore how short, long, and mixed-length sentences shape pacing, emotion, and rhythm so your prose feels intentional instead of flat or repetitive. [19:28] Five practical line editing tools, from reading aloud to spotting junk words, that help you tighten and strengthen your manuscript. Whether you're revising a first draft or doing late-stage editing, these five tips will help you make intentional, powerful choices on every page. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Karyn Fischer WebsiteAlice Sudlow WebsiteJulie Artz Website⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn how to build a focused, authentic author platform to connect with readers early, grow your visibility, and create lasting momentum for your book launch. In this episode, I’m joined by Shelby Leigh, bestselling author of four poetry books (with over 60,000 copies sold!) and the founder of Marketing by Shelby, where she's helped more than 8,000 authors and creatives learn how to market their books with ease. Shelby and I talk about how to start building your author platform before your book launches, what to post when you don't have a book out yet, and how to market in a way that fits your personality (even if you’re introverted or allergic to salesy marketing). Here’s what we cover: [02:15] How Shelby went from anonymous poet to book marketing educator, and what helped her embrace book promotion as an introvert who once dreaded it. [05:25] What an author platform actually includes (it’s more than social media!) and how early (or late) you should build one that works. [12:30] The 3-Part “Show, Sell, Story Tell” content framework for sharing your work online without feeling pushy or performative. [18:15] The most common author-platform mistakes writers make and the mindset shifts that turn confusing marketing into genuine reader connection. [20:40] How to set up your first email list, plan a low-stress book launch, and keep growing your readership long after release week. Whether you're preparing to publish or just starting your first draft, you'll discover simple, sustainable ways to market your book and connect with readers who'll love it. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Marketing By Shelby WebsiteGrab Shelby’s Free List Growth Starter Kit⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover why clarity (not secrecy) is the key to keeping your readers engaged, curious, and emotionally invested in your story. Writers often think suspense means withholding information, but what if the opposite were true? In this episode, I'm joined by Daniel David Wallace, author, writing teacher, and founder of the annual Escape the Plot Forest Summit, to discuss why holding back details can leave readers confused or disconnected rather than curious. Daniel explains how sharing the right information at the right time builds trust, deepens emotion, and makes every twist hit exactly the way you intended.  Here’s what we cover: [02:25] Why trying to keep readers guessing for too long kills tension, and what actually makes a mystery feel exciting instead of confusing. [06:35] How the fear of being ‘too obvious’ causes writers to hide key details, and why showing your hand sooner can keep readers even more engaged. [10:00] What The Hunger Games can teach us about foreshadowing in fiction through the famous berry scene. [18:00] What it really means to treat your reader like a friend, and how building trust keeps people invested in your story from start to finish. [20:00] Where writers go wrong with multi-POV—and why including more POVs isn't always the way to make your story clear to readers If you've ever worried that giving too much away will ruin your story, this episode will change how you think about suspense, clarity, and reader trust. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Daniel David Wallace Website The Character First Story Free Writing course⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn how to work with beta readers in a grounded, calm way so feedback feels useful, not overwhelming. You're nearing the finish line of your first draft, or maybe you've just crossed it. Either way, the question is the same… what happens next? Should you send it to friends? Hire an editor? Bury it in a drawer? Everyone keeps mentioning “beta readers,” but what does that actually mean? And how do you find the right ones without losing your mind or your confidence? In this episode, I’m breaking down the entire beta-reader process so you can take your book from first draft to ready-to-share with total clarity (and zero panic). You’ll hear me talk about things like: [01:45] What beta readers actually do (and what they don't), so you approach this next step with the right intentions to avoid disappointment.  [02:55] The "blind spot” problem every author faces after finishing a draft, and how beta readers give you a fresh perspective when you're too close to your story.  [05:15] Where to find reliable, genre-savvy beta readers that don’t ghost you and deliver quality feedback instead of vague opinions. [09:25] How to set clear expectations before beta readers start so you get useful, specific notes instead of confusing contradictions. [14:45] What to do after the feedback arrives: how to sort through conflicting opinions, decide what to keep, and turn it all into a calm, actionable revision plan. Finishing your first draft is a huge accomplishment, but inviting beta readers in can feel like a whole new level of vulnerability. This episode will help you take that next step with composure so you can share your story, stay true to your vision, and come out the other side with a stronger manuscript and a clearer sense of direction. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: The Spun Yarn for beta readersTake the Author Success Blueprint Quiz to get personalized next steps for your writing, editing, and publishing journey.Ready to map out your complete editing journey from first draft to published novel? Get your step-by-step editing roadmap → here. ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Ever wonder why some horror stories linger in your mind long after the lights go out? Jamie Nash reveals how structure (not jump scares or gore) creates true terror. In this episode, I’m joined by Jamie Nash, screenwriter and author of Save the Cat! Writes Horror, the ultimate guide to creating “Monster in the House” stories that keep readers up at night. With over 25 years of experience writing and teaching horror (including films like V/H/S/2 and Lovely Molly), Jamie shares how to craft terrifying tales using Blake Snyder’s iconic Save the Cat! framework. We talk about how structure, theme, and moral depth make stories truly scary and how to balance dread, scares, and gross-outs for maximum impact. Whether you’re writing a slow-burn psychological thriller or a relentless survival horror, this episode will show you how to use the Save the Cat! framework to make every scream count. [03:45] What makes a novel truly horror and how to tell if your story actually fits this genre (before you waste time writing the wrong one). [05:58] The three ingredients every unforgettable horror story needs and why missing even one can ruin your scare factor. [18:24] How to use Save the Cat! beats to build tension and fear so your story feels cohesive and terrifying, not random and rushed. [24:11] The two main types of horror pacing, and which one to choose to keep your readers gripped.  [32:53] Why passive heroes kill good horror and how to turn your protagonist into the story’s fiercest weapon. [36:32] The difference between dread, scares, and gross outs, and why dread flags (red flags that signal unease) are the true engine of horror. If you’ve ever wondered how to write horror that lingers long after the last page, this conversation with Jamie Nash is your masterclass in scarecraft. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Jamie Nash Website Save the Cat! Writes HorrorSave the Cat! website⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn the five key plot points that turn struggling manuscripts into finished novels—and exactly where they need to appear in your story structure. Have you ever felt like your story just isn't clicking, no matter how much effort you've put into it? Maybe you've polished your prose, developed your characters, and built an intriguing world—but something still feels off. In this episode, I sat down with Kristina Stanley—award-winning author, fiction editor, and founder of Fictionary—to uncover the structural secrets that transform good stories into unforgettable ones. Here's what we discussed: [03:15] Why your beautifully written novel might feel "stuck" despite compelling characters—and the structural secret that transforms wandering manuscripts into page-turners[05:45] The five essential scenes that form every successful novel's backbone, including the exact percentages where they should appear in your manuscript[23:45] Why the midpoint is where most novels soar or lose their way—and how to create the shift that keeps readers hooked through Act Two[30:30] Plot Point 2's dual purpose that most writers miss: combining your darkest moment with the crucial information needed for the climax[34:30] How to craft climaxes that satisfy readers by answering your story's central question (not just adding exciting action scenes)Plus, Kristina shares her "story test" for evaluating your manuscript and explains why fixing structure before polishing prose will save you months of revision time. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Fictionary.coGrab Fictionary’s course, An Insider's View of Story Editing, for FREE here (a $39 value)⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Should you include a prologue or skip it? Here's how to make the right choice for your novel. Prologues are one of the most debated topics in fiction. Some literary agents warn against them, some readers skip them altogether, and yet many of the most beloved bestselling novels begin with one. The real question is this: Does your story need a prologue, or will Chapter One carry the weight on its own? In this episode, I'm breaking down when a prologue truly adds value, when it works against you, and how to write a prologue that pulls readers in instead of pushing them away. If you've been second-guessing whether your book needs a prologue, this conversation will provide a clear way forward and the confidence to know you're making the right decision for your story. Here’s what you’ll hear inside the episode: [02:05] Why most prologues fall flat and the single question that tells you if yours is worth keeping. [03:30] The five types of prologues that actually work (with bestselling examples you’ve probably read and loved) and how to know which one, if any, your book actually needs. [08:40] Why Brandon Sanderson’s prologue in The Way of Kings is a masterclass in hooking readers and setting the stage for an epic story [11:45] The three key ingredients every strong prologue requires if you want readers to become immersed from the first page and keep turning the pages. [14:50] Actionable tips to help you create intrigue, build tension, and leave readers desperate to turn the page into Chapter One. By the end of this episode, you won't be stuck second-guessing your beginning anymore. You'll know whether your novel needs a prologue or if Chapter One is the stronger start (and you’ll understand why). That way, instead of circling back to rework your first pages again and again, you can move forward with confidence, knowing your story is starting exactly where it’s meant to. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Take the Author Success Blueprint Quiz to get personalized next steps for your writing, editing, and publishing journeyGrab my free Novel Writing Roadmap, a simple, step-by-step plan to help you trust your story, remove the guesswork, and actually finish your first draft.⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn how to write authentic, diverse characters without over-explaining or fearing criticism. Writing diverse characters can feel intimidating. You want to include different voices in your story, but worry about misrepresenting them. This leads many writers to either avoid diversity altogether or fall into the trap of over-explaining everything for a mainstream gaze, thereby diluting the power of their story. In this episode, I sit down with Tiffany Grimes, founder of Burgeon Design and Editorial and an MFA-trained editor who specializes in amplifying marginalized voices. After recognizing areas for growth in her own feedback, Tiffany has spent years helping writers shed performative expectations and write with radical honesty. Here's what we cover: [05:40] Tiffany's vulnerable experience writing about a Vietnamese character and learning she wasn't the right person to tell that story. [10:06] The core framework that separates writing "about" a community versus writing "to" your community from the inside. [18:48] Why you should give yourself permission to write the stereotype first in early drafts. [20:24] How Jesinia (a deaf character in the Fourth Wing) shows why trusting your audience creates better representation. [21:20] The protection question that helps you identify when you're diluting your story for mainstream audiences. [26:53] Understanding emotional clarity and how readers' experience goes deeper than just character representation. Whether you're writing characters from your own experience or exploring different perspectives, this conversation offers compassionate guidance for creating authentic, powerful stories that honor both your characters and your readers. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Tiffany Grimes WebsiteFree Workbook: Breaking Mindset Barriers and Setting Intentional Goals⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Five book coaches reveal the editing secrets that turn messy first drafts into ready-to-publish manuscripts. Finishing a first draft is an incredible milestone, but what comes next can feel overwhelming. If you're staring at your messy pages and wondering how to even begin editing, you're not alone. The good news is that there is a way to move forward without spiraling into revision confusion or self-doubt. In this episode, I've invited five fiction writing coaches to share their best tips for tackling your messy first draft. These strategies will help you gain clarity, cut through the overwhelm, and make real progress toward a publishing-ready manuscript. Here's what you'll learn: [02:05] A clever mindset trick that exposes what's really on your pages and why changing your font is editing gold. [07:30] Why putting your finished first draft away for a little while is the secret to finding your story's true purpose. [16:45] How two simple "If Only" statements reveal exactly what's missing from your protagonist's journey and plot structure. [12:35] The "one element at a time" editing method that stops you from drowning in overwhelming revisions and actually makes progress. [22:30] Why your climactic scene holds all the revision answers and how to mine it for the characters, skills, and growth your story needs. Tune in to learn how to edit your messy first draft with confidence, simplicity, and ease so you can finally move closer to the finished book you've been dreaming about. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Monica Cox’s WebsiteErin Halden’s WebsiteNita Collins’s Website Elyse Seal’s WebsiteAyesha Ali’s Website Ready to edit your novel? Grab my FREE DIY Editing Roadmap: 10 Steps To Editing Your Novel that’ll help you turn your messy first draft into a publish-ready manuscript without the overwhelm and wasted effort.⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

You’ve poured your heart into writing your book, but now you’re staring down the next challenge: how do you actually get it into readers’ hands?  Marketing your book can feel overwhelming, but it doesn't have to be. With the right tools—like AI—you can turn it into a streamlined, even fun, part of your creative process. In this episode, I’m breaking down five beginner-friendly ways AI can help you market your book and connect with readers, all while keeping your voice authentic and your time focused on writing. Tune in to learn: [03:30] How to use AI to craft an author website that feels personal, professional, and uniquely YOU—even if tech isn’t your thing.[05:40] The exact prompts to create a welcome email sequence that turns casual subscribers into loyal fans.[08:40] How AI can help you brainstorm and batch-create social media content that connects with readers (without the overwhelm).[10:55] A step-by-step process for using AI to write a book description that hooks readers and drives sales.[13:00] How to leverage AI to draft personalized podcast pitches that get you booked on shows your readers already love.Whether you’re just starting to write or gearing up to publish, these AI strategies will help you market your book with ease and confidence. Tune in now and start using AI to connect with readers today! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get 5 free AI prompts to simplify your book marketing and connect with readers faster—download now!Ep. 106 - 5 Steps to Building Your Author PlatformEp. 107 - Email List Building Essentials For Authors⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Want to write a Romantasy that readers obsess over? Here’s how to deliver the tropes, intimacy, and magic readers crave. Romantasy is everywhere right now, and for good reason—it’s the perfect mix of swoony romance, epic fantasy, and unforgettable characters. But if you’ve ever thought, “How do I even start writing Romantasy?” you’re not alone. With so much hype around the genre, it’s easy to feel overwhelmed by all the tropes, rules, and expectations. That’s why I sat down with Jenna Moreci, an award-winning and Amazon bestselling author, to break down her best tips from her upcoming book, How to Write Romantasy. Whether you’re plotting your first fantasy romance or trying to figure out how to balance magic and intimacy, this episode is packed with actionable advice to help you avoid the most common mistakes, create power couples readers can't stop rooting for, and write the Romantasy you’ve been dreaming of. Here’s what we talk about:  [07:31] How to approach popular tropes like ‘shadow daddies’ in a way that feels unique to your story, rather than copying and pasting. [11:42] The 3-part chemistry framework that helps your characters belong together and saves you from endless rewrites. [17:00] Why emotional intimacy is the real secret weapon in Romantasy, plus the five types of scenes you can’t skip. [22:25] Smut, spice, or sweet? The surprising truth about writing intimate scenes and why they don’t have to be “super steamy” to hook readers. [32:28] Why writing Romantasy should be fun and the mindset shift that makes the whole process more enjoyable. If you've been wondering how to write Romantasy or you're plotting your first fantasy romance, this episode is your ultimate guide to balancing fantasy, romance, reader expectations, and earning those five-star reviews. ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Pre-Order How to Write RomantasyGet a FREE Digital Workbook With Proof of Preorder HereYouTube: Writing With Jenna MoreciEp. 182- Writing Romantasy: How to Balance Fantasy Elements and Romance in Your NovelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover the five essential strategies for mastering multiple-POV novels without confusing your readers. Have you ever wondered if you could write a multi-POV story like The Girl on the Train? Or how about The Six of Crows? The kind that pulls you into multiple characters' worlds so completely that you feel like you know each one personally? Writing a multiple-POV novel can create incredible depth and complexity when done correctly. But it can also turn your story into a confusing mess if you don't know the essential multi-POV techniques. Whether you're considering writing your first multiple POV story or you're curious about what makes some multi-perspective novels so captivating (while others fall flat), this episode will spill it all. Tune in to discover: [02:50] The truth about how many POV characters your story actually needs. [04:35] The easiest way to make each character's voice so different that readers never get confused about who's speaking. [06:40] Why 'head-hopping' is the fastest way to lose readers, and the simple rule that prevents it every time. [08:00] The one question that reveals whether showing the same scene twice will captivate readers or kill your pacing. [09:00] The secret to balancing page time so that readers stay equally invested in every character's journey. Whether you're trying to decide if multiple POVs are right for your story or you're already knee-deep in a multi-POV manuscript and feeling overwhelmed, this episode will give you everything you need to approach it with confidence. ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. #90 - How to Choose the Best POV For Your NovelEp. #196 - The Pros and Cons of Writing A Novel With Multiple Points of ViewSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover the counterintuitive first draft editing approach that transforms messy manuscripts into page-turning novels readers love. Most fiction writers struggle with novel revision because they jump straight into editing their manuscript after finishing their first draft. This approach leads to endless rewrites, overwhelming confusion, and stories that get stuck in endless Chapter 1 revisions, never reaching completion. Developmental editor Alice Sudlow joins me to share her systematic approach to story editing, which helps writers overcome these revision challenges. Her revision framework eliminates the guesswork from the editing process, so writers avoid common mistakes that can keep manuscripts stuck in development. Here's what we cover: [08:11] Why taking a 4-week break after finishing your first draft gives your mind the mental shift needed for effective manuscript revision. [10:26] How to create an outline of your completed draft without making changes, yet (the crucial step that reveals your story's true structure.) [14:38] The fundamental questions that uncover the hidden keys in your story and transform good ideas into compelling narratives that readers can't put down. [17:46] Why developmental editing is where the real magic happens in fiction writing and how to fall in love with the revision process. [38:01] How to escape the endless rewriting cycle that traps writers in Chapter 1 forever and finally complete your novel revisions. Whether you're a first-time novelist struggling with how to edit your manuscript or an experienced writer looking for a better revision strategy, this episode provides the framework you need to turn your draft into a story that agents and readers will love. Tune in now. ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Grab Alice’s FREE Roadmap to a Revision That Actually WorksYour Next Draft Podcast (Hosted by Alice Sudlow)Alice Sudlow’s Website Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Real writers share how they broke free from endless rewrites and abandoned drafts to finally finish their novels in just 90 days—using the exact framework that can unlock your story too. In this episode, I’m sharing real, inspiring stories from fiction writers who went from stuck and overwhelmed to finishing their novels using the exact framework I teach in Notes to Novel. You’ll hear from fantasy writers, contemporary fiction authors, and more—writers who were trapped in endless rewrites, drowning in revision loops, or paralyzed by perfectionism. They all discovered that finishing a novel isn’t about working harder—it’s about having the right process. Here’s what you’ll learn from their breakthroughs: [02:25] How Jennifer broke free from a 3-year struggle with the same manuscript by treating her outline as a flexible “map” instead of a rigid plan.[06:30] Why Nefer finally escaped a 5-year line editing loop by focusing on story structure before prose—and how this one shift transformed her writing process.[10:25] How Tiara went from writing 2,000-word short stories to completing an 80,000-word novel without feeling overwhelmed—by breaking it into manageable scenes.[14:00] The moment Jen realized she didn’t need an MFA to write fiction—just a clear strategy—and finished her first draft in 90 days after spending 2 years stuck on 10 pages.[16:55] How Sheila used genre frameworks to outline a 4-book series AND a standalone novel after spinning her wheels despite reading every craft book out there.Whether you’re stuck rewriting Chapter 1, have abandoned manuscripts piling up, or feel paralyzed by novel structure, these writers prove that finishing your book is possible—even with a busy life and no formal creative writing training. Ready to make your own breakthrough? Enrollment for Notes to Novel closes on August 28th, and we won’t open again until next year. Head to savannahgilbo.com/notes-to-novel to learn more and join the program that’s helped over 800 writers make real progress on their books. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Learn more about Notes to NovelJennifer Landers on InstagramNefer Doane’s website and InstagramTiara Ito’s website and InstagramSheila Holmes on Instagram⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Have you ever sat down to write a novel and thought, “Where do I even begin?” Or maybe you’ve started writing, but something feels... off. The story isn’t coming together the way you imagined, and you’re not sure why. You’re not alone. Most writers struggle with this because they’re missing the foundational elements that make a story work. It’s not about writing beautiful sentences or having a brilliant idea—it’s about knowing how to build a story that readers can’t put down. In this episode, I’m breaking down the five key elements every successful novel needs to hook agents and readers. Whether you’re just starting your first draft or revising for querying, this episode will help you craft a story that works and keeps readers turning the pages. Tune in to learn: [02:40] Why beautiful prose isn’t enough to get published—and the real reason agents reject manuscripts[03:45] The 5 essential elements every successful novel needs to hook agents and readers[04:15] How to create characters readers care about—even if they’re not “likable”[05:20] Why stakes and conflict are the backbone of every compelling story (and how to get them right)[08:25] The secret to crafting an emotional journey that keeps readers turning pages If you’ve been focusing on perfecting your prose but struggling to create a story that works—or if you’ve faced rejection despite positive feedback on your writing style—this episode will transform how you approach novel writing and the publishing process. ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ready to finally write the novel you’ve been dreaming of? Join Notes to Novel—my 8-week live coaching program where I’ll guide you step-by-step to craft a compelling story agents request, and readers devour. Enrollment is open now, but doors close soon—grab your spot today!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

After years of getting stuck at chapter six, Gina Elizabeth finally discovered the missing piece that helped her finish writing not just one novel, but two books in a single year. Today I'm chatting with Gina Elizabeth, indie fantasy romance author of the Bonded in Blood series (and Notes to Novel graduate!), about her transformation from someone who couldn't finish a book to a published author of multiple books. In this episode, you'll hear us talk about things like: [04:00] Why she couldn't get past chapter 6 for two decades—and the surprising tool she didn't even know existed that changed everything[09:15] How learning to outline a novel actually freed Gina’s creativity instead of stifling it (plus why her outline felt "chaotic and crazy" but worked anyway)[10:50] What happened when I suggested Gina cut 20% of her draft (and how she turned those cut scenes into a prequel novella that readers love)[20:30] The "write forward" technique that helped Gina overcome writer's block and finish her first draft in 6-12 months[25:00] A behind-the-scenes look at Gina’s marketing plans, including what’s working so far and what she still plans to do before book 2’s releaseIf you're tired of abandoned manuscripts and ready to finally finish your novel, Gina's journey from 20 years of false starts to published author proves it's never too late to learn how. Press play to discover the exact strategies that helped her break through the chapter six curse for good. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Hunted (Bonded By Blood) by Gina ElizabethHide: A Bonded In Blood Novella by Gina ElizabethGina Elizabeth on InstagramGina Elizabeth’s WebsiteJoin the Notes to Novel waitlist⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

The myth that plotting kills creativity is keeping countless discovery writers stuck in an endless cycle of abandoned manuscripts—but what if structure could actually set your creativity free? If you're a pantser convinced that outlining will ruin your creative process, or you've been discovery writing through multiple unfinished manuscripts, this episode will change how you think about story structure. You'll hear from three committed pantsers who thought outlining meant creative death. Katherine could sprint to 50k words in three weeks but spent a year editing manuscripts she'd abandon. Bree followed "only see as far as your headlights" advice for a decade, stuck on the same 25 pages. Casey watched her stories die in the middle with no way forward. Their discoveries transformed their entire approach to storytelling—proving that the right structure actually amplifies creativity instead of stifling it. In this episode, you'll learn: [03:15] How a discovery writer transformed 7 abandoned manuscripts into a polished novel by creating a "flexible outline" while drafting—eliminating 9 months of developmental editing[4:50] The simple daily practice of checking scenes for goal, motivation, and conflict that turned a chronic underwriter's 50k-word sprint into a robust 72k-word draft[08:45] Why the common pantser advice to "only see as far as your headlights" kept one writer stuck on the same 25 pages for a decade (and what finally freed her)[09:25]  How understanding genre expectations finally helped a pantser break through the dreaded middle of her novel where stories kept dying[11:20] Why "pantsing with direction" gives discovery writers the best of both worlds—creative spontaneity with a clear story roadmap to reach "The End"If you're ready to find the perfect balance between structure and creativity—and want the complete framework these writers used to finish their novels—join the waitlist for the next open enrollment of my Notes to Novel course. Don’t miss your chance to turn your ideas into a finished draft you’re proud of! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Grab this free guide to see how real writers (like you!) pushed past the most common writing roadblocks to finish their novels: 5 Writing Roadblocks Keeping You Stuck & How to Break ThroughKatherine Varley on InstagramBree Cox on InstagramCasey Drillette on Instagram⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

The myth of "writing free" is keeping talented writers stuck on Chapter One. Here's why story structure actually enhances creativity—and how to use it to finally finish your novel. You've been told that outlining kills creativity. That real writers don't need structure. That planning your novel will turn it into a formulaic mess. But what if everything you believe about story structure is wrong? In this episode, I'm revealing why the writers who resist structure often end up trapped in the smallest creative box of all—and how embracing the right kind of framework can actually set your imagination free. Tune in to hear me talk about: [02:00] The romantic myth of the "pure" creative process and why the image of writers channeling pure inspiration without planning is actually sabotaging your novel writing journey[02:22] What really happens when you try to "just write" without structure (and the predictable pattern that traps pantsers: from magical first chapters to tangled plots to endless rewrites of your opening pages)[04:34] Why constraints breed creativity—and how having boundaries actually pushes you past the obvious into innovative storytelling[05:43] The 5 hidden costs of avoiding story structure (aka what you're really sacrificing when you resist novel outlining)[08:27] Why understanding story beats and plot points doesn't make your writing formulaic and how it actually makes your story more powerfulPlus, I share real examples of writers who went from structure-phobic to finishing their first novels in record time—including one creative writing student who completed 114,000 words in just 88 days after finally embracing the outlining process! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Read the full blog post hereJoin the Notes to Novel waitlist⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

After years of collecting every writing craft book imaginable and studying with renowned editors, Neroli Lacey discovered that too much knowledge was actually keeping her stuck—until she learned to implement instead of accumulate. Today I'm chatting with Neroli Lacey, author of The Perfumer's Secret (a Pulitzer Prize Finalist, International Book Awards Winner, and National Indie Excellence Award Winner), about how focusing on implementation over information finally helped her transform her messy manuscript into an award-winning Women’s Fiction novel. In this episode, you'll hear us talk about things like: [05:55] Why owning "every craft book imaginable" and studying with top editors still left her with an unfinished novel (and the overwhelm that comes from trying to follow multiple systems at once)[07:30] The three foundational shifts that moved Neroli from scattered studying to focused execution—and finally finishing her first draft[10:55]  Why she chose hybrid publishing over traditional (and what that two-year process actually looked like)[13:50] How a self-proclaimed introvert built a 3,000-person newsletter by focusing on book recommendations instead of writing updates[22:40] Neroli’s advice for aspiring authors who are working on finishing their first book—"You don't have to know what you're doing—you take the first step and the path appears."If you've been collecting craft books but struggling to finish your novel, Neroli's story will resonate. Press play to discover why implementation beats accumulation every time! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Neroli Lacey’s websiteNeroli Lacey on InstagramGrab a FREE copy of Neroli’s book here!Buy The Perfumer’s Secret by Neroli LaceySue Campbell for book marketingJoin the Notes to Novel waitlist⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

What if perfectionism is the real reason you haven't finished your novel—not lack of talent or time? "I need to get this right before I move on" keeps aspiring authors stuck forever. But here's what I've discovered... Perfectionism isn't about having high standards. It's about fear. Fear of judgment, failure, or not being "good enough." In this episode, you'll hear from three reformed perfectionists who broke free from the endless editing trap and finished their novels. Meet Pornika, who delayed starting for months thinking she needed every detail figured out first. Amy, working on her eighth novel but never finishing because she'd spend weeks perfecting each chapter. And Kara, who wrote 100,000 words but got overwhelmed trying to fix its problems. None of them lowered their standards. Instead, they discovered something far more powerful: how to write messy and make real progress. In this episode, you'll learn: [03:10] How a corporate finance professional went from months of planning paralysis to 114k words in 88 days using the fast drafting technique that changed everything[05:15] Why a writer starting her eighth novel finally broke her pattern of endless chapter editing and discovered the foundational skills that put her "in the power seat"[06:00] Why understanding theme, genre conventions, and scene structure actually makes writing easier and more enjoyable, not more restrictive[07:30] The "magical revisions" technique that lets you keep moving forward without getting bogged down in details you haven't figured out yet[09:00] The structural breakthrough that helped one writer transform a problematic 100k-word manuscript into a publishable novel[15:00] How to shift from perfectionist paralysis to forward momentum without sacrificing the quality you care aboutReady to stop polishing and start finishing? Join Poornika, Amy, Kara, and hundreds of other reformed perfectionists who've discovered that messy first drafts lead to better novels. Get on the waitlist for the next open enrollment of my Notes to Novel course and get my complete, step-by-step framework for writing a story that works. Don’t miss your chance to turn your ideas into a finished draft you’re proud of! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Grab my free guide to see how real writers (like you!) pushed past these roadblocks to finish their novels: 5 Writing Roadblocks Keeping You Stuck & How to Break ThroughPoornika Kakkanaiah InstagramAmi Blackford InstagramKara Kentley Instagram⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

All those writing articles you've bookmarked? They might be the exact reason you can't finish your novel. Here's what's really happening—and the simple shift that changes everything. You know that browser folder labeled "Writing Advice"? The one with 147 articles about plot structure and 83 posts on character development? Yeah, that one. What if I told you it's actually keeping you stuck? In this episode, I'm exposing the "writing advice trap" that catches even the most dedicated writers. After helping hundreds of writers finish their novels, I've discovered why the most knowledgeable writers often write the least (and what you can do differently starting today).  Tune in to hear me talk about: [00:52] Why writers who read the most writing advice often can't finish their novels (the pattern that surprised me)[01:53] How to stop rewriting Chapter One forever (and what broke the cycle for a writer stuck for 5 years[03:44] Save the Cat vs Hero's Journey vs Story Grid (and why contradictory writing advice is keeping you stuck[08:16] The 3 things successful writers do differently to actually finish their first draft[12:20] How to choose a writing method and stick with it (plus the one question that changes everything)The truth? Any complete system works better than ten partial systems. You don't need the "perfect" method. You need to pick one and follow it all the way through. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Read the full blog post hereGet your free First Draft RoadmapJoin the Notes to Novel waitlist⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

After years of rewriting the same sagging middle and juggling two confusing timelines, Kara Kentley discovered the romance structure secrets that transformed her messy draft into a published novel that sells daily. Today I'm chatting with Kara Kentley, contemporary romance author of Another Summer and a Notes to Novel graduate, about how learning genre expectations finally helped her finish the book she'd been struggling with for years. In this episode, you'll hear us talk about things like: [07:46] Why her 95,000-word draft had a "sagging middle" that lost readers halfway through (and the two-timeline problem making it worse)[11:55] How choosing one timeline and adding dual POV transformed her confused manuscript into a cohesive story[15:05] The relief she felt discovering romance novels have specific beats that happen in order—and how this became her roadmap[20”15] Kara’s nightmare writing conference experience (and what she learned about starting your book in the right place)[35:35] What happened when she launched without reviews or marketing—and still became #1 in her category for two weeksIf you've been struggling to finish your romance novel or any manuscript with structural problems, Kara's journey from pantsed chaos to organized success proves that the right framework can set you free. Press play to discover how romance structure could be the missing piece you need to finally type "The End." 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Kara Kentley’s websiteBuy Another Summer by Kara KentleyJoin the Notes to Novel waitlistThe Complete Writer's Guide to Heroes and Heroines: Sixteen Master Archetypes by Tami D. Cowden, Caro LaFever, & Sue VidersTravis Baldree’s articleI Need A Book Cover⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

What if the reason you haven't written your novel has nothing to do with how many hours are in your day? "I don't have time to write" might be the most common excuse that stops aspiring authors before they even start. But here’s what I’ve learned after working with hundreds of writers… It’s not about how much time you have that matters. It’s about what you do with your limited time that counts. In this episode, you'll hear from three busy writers who had every legitimate reason to put their writing dreams on hold—yet didn't. Meet Maddie, a mom of four kids aged one to six who wrote her first draft while juggling pregnancy, a newborn, and a copywriting career. Rhonda, a clinical pharmacist who transitioned from competing in 14-hour triathlons to writing an 80,000-word manuscript. And Mark, a former college administrator, worried it was too late in life to learn how to write a novel.  None of them found magical extra hours in their day. Instead, they discovered something far more powerful: how to make their limited writing time more effective. In this episode, you’ll learn: [03:00] How a mom of four young children completed her first draft in just six months of actual writing time, including taking a year-long break for pregnancy and a newborn, without losing momentum[06:25] Why one debut author discovered that following a proven framework didn't create a cookie-cutter novel—it actually freed him to be more creative and original[09:35] The mindset shift that helped a 45-year-old clinical pharmacist transition from grueling 14-hour triathlons to completing her first 80,000-word novel[13:20] Why having limited writing time can actually make you a more effective writer, when you know exactly what to write in each sessionReady to stop using "no time" as your excuse? Join Maddie, Rhonda, Mark, and hundreds of other busy writers who've discovered that you don't need more hours—you need a better plan. Get on the waitlist for the next open enrollment of my Notes to Novel course and get my complete, step-by-step framework for writing a story that works. Don’t miss your chance to turn your ideas into a finished draft you’re proud of! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Grab this free guide to discover how busy writers (with kids, jobs, and real lives!) find time to write consistently and finish their novels: 5 Time Management Strategies to Help You Write Your NovelMadi Unruh InstagramMark Mrozinski Instagram⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Feel stuck "finding time" to write your novel? You might be solving the wrong problem. Here's what's really going on—and what to do instead. Why does finding time to write feel impossible sometimes? We blame our busy schedules (and yes, that's definitely part of it). But there's something else lurking beneath the surface that stops your writing progress dead in its tracks. And it has a way of making you feel like you're failing at this whole writing thing. Which is so not true. In this episode, I'm pulling back the curtain on why "finding time" is actually making it HARDER to write your novel. Plus, I'm sharing 3 powerful mindset shifts and practical strategies to finally break free from this trap so you can finish your novel with the life you're actually living. You'll hear me talk about things like: [02:45] Why the writers who complain most about "no time" often spend hours on writing-related activities (just not actual writing) [03:15] The hidden truth about "not enough time" that's actually keeping you stuck (hint: it's not what you think) [05:15] How decision paralysis can waste your precious writing time—and the simple fix that takes 2 minutes [06:10] Why some writers accomplish more in 20 minutes than others do in 2 hours [07:25] The mindset shift that transforms time from your enemy into your creative ally (and 3 practical strategies to implement these shifts starting today) Your story deserves to be told. Not someday when you have "more time." Not eventually when life calms down. But now, with the life you're actually living. The time is already there—you just need to see it differently. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Grab the free Time Management Guide here!Join the Notes to Novel waitlist⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

What if the reason you're stuck on your novel isn't about talent or creativity, but simply a missing piece of the puzzle that could change everything? Every writer knows that soul-crushing feeling of being completely stuck. Not just procrastinating or battling writer's block, but that specific paralysis where you love your story idea, want to write, but have absolutely no idea how to move forward.  In this episode, you'll hear from three writers who faced this exact challenge in very different ways. Kelsey wrote 11,000 words of an adult fantasy novel before hitting a wall with no idea what should happen next. Liya spent eight years starting and stopping the same young adult series, never making it past the first few chapters. And Danyel loved her idea, but kept running into structural problems she couldn’t solve.  What they discovered transformed not just their current projects, but their entire approach to storytelling—and their breakthroughs reveal exactly what might be missing from your own writing process. In this episode, you’ll learn: [05:05] The surprising way that reducing from two point-of-view characters to one solved major structural problems and created more mystery and page-turning tension in a thriller[08:00] Why having a flexible outline is like "someone turning on the lights and handing you a map"—and how it can make writing feel fun and exciting again instead of wandering in the dark[11:05] How understanding the crucial difference between scenes and chapters unlocked eight years of frustration for one writer and completely transformed her approach to story structure[14:15] Why being stuck isn't about lacking talent—it's simply an indication that you're missing a foundational piece of your storyIf you’re ready for your breakthrough moment—and want my complete, step-by-step framework for writing a story that works—join the waitlist for the next open enrollment of my Notes to Novel course. Don’t miss your chance to turn your ideas into a finished draft you’re proud of! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Grab this free guide to see how real writers (like you!) pushed past the most common writing roadblocks to finish their novels: 5 Writing Roadblocks Keeping You Stuck & How to Break ThroughDanyel Nicole InstagramKelsey Evans InstagramLiya Grey Instagram⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Ever wonder why 97% of aspiring authors never finish their books? The answer might surprise you. If you've been dreaming about writing a novel but find yourself starting and stopping, getting stuck in the middle, or just staring at a blank page wondering where to even begin, you're not alone. Here's what I've noticed after working with hundreds of writers: the ones who actually finish their novels aren't more talented or creative than you. They've just learned to navigate around five specific roadblocks that trap everyone else in an endless cycle of starting and stopping. In this episode, I'm breaking down exactly what those writing roadblocks are and how you can sidestep them to break free from the cycle that keeps so many writers trapped. This is what I talk about:  [03:00] The planning trap that leaves writers lost in the "saggy middle" with no clue how to move forward (and why even a simple roadmap changes everything). [04:50] Why chasing the perfect first sentence is killing your momentum and what successful authors do instead when they sit down to write. [00:00] How consuming endless writing advice keeps you from actually writing and the one thing you need to focus on to finally make progress. [06:35] Why trying to write your novel completely alone makes everything ten times harder, and what kind of support actually helps you finish. [08:10] The fundamental difference between writers who finish and those who don't (and it's probably not what you're expecting). If you've been stuck in the start-and-stop cycle or wondering if you'll ever actually finish your novel, this episode reveals precisely how to join the small percentage of writers who actually make it to The End. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Want my complete, step-by-step framework for writing a story that works? Join the waitlist for the next open enrollment of my Notes to Novel course. Don’t miss your chance to turn your ideas into a finished draft you’re proud of!Grab this free guide to see how real writers (like you!) pushed past the most common writing roadblocks to finish their novels: 5 Writing Roadblocks Keeping You Stuck & How to Break Through⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Master character development with these five must-read books that transform static characters from boring to brilliant. You've created characters with compelling backstories, but somehow, they still feel... flat. They move through your plot but don't feel like real people. Here's the thing: character development is what makes readers fall in love with your story, not just read it. But it's also one of the trickiest parts of fiction writing. That’s why today, I'm sharing five books that have completely transformed my approach to character development. And they've also helped hundreds of my students create characters readers are totally invested in.  You'll hear me talk about things like: [01:17] Why most characters feel flat even when they have clear goals and motivations (and which book can help you unlock the missing piece) [06:22] My favorite resource for understanding character arcs, whether you’re writing a positive arc, a negative arc, or a flat one [08:16] Which book can help you understand your villain's emotional wounds—and why this might be more important than perfecting your protagonist's backstory [10:35] A book that’ll help you make readers feel your character's emotions without ever naming a single feeling on the page [00:00] My go-to resource for learning how to marry your plot with your characters (this one’s especially good for pantsers who want a little more structure!) If your characters feel static despite having detailed backstories, or if you're struggling to show meaningful character growth throughout your story, this episode will give you the exact resources you need to create characters readers will never forget. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Join the waitlist for my Notes to Novel courseWant me to send you this list of recommendations? Click here!⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn how to handle book reviews without letting them crush your confidence or derail your writing dreams. Receiving your first book review can be both thrilling and terrifying at the same time. Whether it's a glowing five-star love letter or a brutal one-star takedown, reader reviews can send even the most confident authors into an emotional tailspin. I recently sat down with book coaches Emily Golden and Rachel May of Golden May Editing to discuss the challenge of negative reviews. Between their own publishing experiences and years of guiding clients through review season, they know exactly what separates thriving authors from those who let negative feedback derail their dreams. Tune in to hear us talk about things like: [03:45] Why book reviews feel so much more intense than beta reader feedback (and the one key difference that changes everything). [08:25] How to separate your novel from your identity so criticism doesn't feel like a personal attack on your self-worth. [11:05] Why trying to "toughen up" actually makes book reviews hurt worse (and what to do instead when they sting). [35:35] The simple boundary you can set with ARC readers to avoid getting ambushed by negative reviews. [40:25] Why we obsess over one-star reviews but barely notice five-star ones (and how to flip this script). [41:45] Whether you should let reviews influence your future writing decisions, and a brilliant way to use feedback as data, not direction. Whether you're approaching your first book launch or struggling with review anxiety, this episode offers practical strategies to navigate both praise and criticism. ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Anti-Hustle Writing Life Masterclass Golden May Editing Website  Story Magic PodcastSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Master the art of creating irresistible, page-turning curiosity without confusing or frustrating your readers. Have you ever written what you thought was a brilliantly mysterious scene, only to have readers say they were completely lost? Or maybe you've struggled with knowing how much information to reveal and when? Here's what most writers don't realize: there's a fine line between being mysterious and being vague. And the writers who master evoking curiosity without being vague or confusing are the ones who create truly compelling fiction. In this episode, you'll hear me talk about things like: [02:35] Why most writers mistake withholding information for creating mystery—and the simple test to tell if you're being mysterious or just vague[03:20] The movie trailer analogy that'll completely change how you think about revealing information to readers[6:55] How to give readers the essential context they need to stay grounded in your story without giving everything away[8:25] Why the missing information must matter deeply to your protagonist—and how to tie your mysteries to what characters desperately want[10:30] How to deliver information that keeps readers engaged and wanting more (without just withholding everything)[11:50] The one question that determines whether you're creating compelling mystery or confusing noise, plus how to apply this across every genreWhether you're writing romance, fantasy, thrillers, or any other type of fiction, this episode will help you create the kind of curiosity and tension that keeps readers glued to the page instead of accidentally driving them away. ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Want my entire step-by-step process for brainstorming, outlining, and writing your first draft? Click here to learn more about my Notes to Novel program.Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover the pros and cons of writing a novel from multiple POVs—including how to avoid the #1 mistake that kills multi-POV novels. Are multiple point-of-view characters right for your story?  Will they create the kind of depth that keeps readers hooked, or will they just leave you with a tangled mess of voices that never quite click together? Writing a multi-POV novel is one of the most challenging approaches to storytelling. When done well, it creates a rich, immersive experience that readers absolutely love. But when done poorly, it can completely derail your entire manuscript. In today's episode, I'll explain what it means to write a multiple-point-of-view novel, how it differs from other narrative approaches, and if it's the right choice for your story. You'll hear me talk about things like: [03:05] Why most writers confuse multiple POV with omniscient POV and how this one mistake can sabotage your entire story. [04:50] The surprising way multiple perspectives create story depth that makes readers think about your book long after finishing it (think Game of Thrones level complexity). [07:15] My favorite "secret weapon" technique that uses contrasting viewpoints to create those jaw-dropping "aha" moments readers can't stop talking about. [11:00] The #1 challenge that kills most multi-POV novels before they're even finished (hint: it's not plot structure, and it's definitely not what you think). [15:25] Five make-or-break questions to ask yourself before committing to multiple POVs (because choosing the wrong narrative approach can derail months of hard work.) If you've been wondering whether your story needs different character perspectives or if you're already writing from multiple points of view but feel overwhelmed by the nuances, this episode will give you the clarity and confidence you need to move forward. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. #90 - How to Choose the Best POV For Your Novel⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Master the fundamental building block of fiction writing with this one exercise that's helped writers break through years of stalled progress in just weeks. Ever wonder why some writers seem to improve rapidly while others stay stuck for years, despite writing every single day? 🤔 The difference isn't talent or luck—it's deliberate practice. Most aspiring novelists think that accumulating word count is the path to improvement. But here's the truth: without targeted practice and expert feedback, you might be reinforcing bad habits rather than developing good ones. Tim Grahl is the CEO of Story Grid, author of six books, and has analyzed over 2,000 scenes from aspiring writers. What he's discovered about skill development might completely change how you approach your writing journey. In this episode, you'll hear us talk about things like: [24:45] Why most writers don't improve even when they write every day—and the missing piece that separates writers who progress from those who stay stuck[02:11] The surprising shift Story Grid made from teaching big-picture structure to focusing on scene-level fundamentals instead[10:02] The 3-step framework for creating a deliberate writing practice that builds real skills instead of just word count[15:16] The three most common scene-writing mistakes that kill narrative momentum—and how to avoid them[24:27] Why getting expert feedback (not just writing in isolation) is the crucial element most writers missWhether you're staring at your first blank page or you've got a drawer full of unfinished manuscripts, this episode will show you exactly how to break the cycle of starting and stopping and finally make meaningful progress on your writing! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Story Grid’s Scene Checklist (Free Resource)⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Congratulations! You've finished writing your novel, and you've set your sights on self-publishing. But now you're staring at your manuscript, wondering, "Where do I start?" If you're feeling overwhelmed by the self-publishing process, you're not alone.  Most first-time authors don't realize just how many decisions the self-publishing process involves. From choosing file formats and pricing strategies to designing covers and optimizing metadata—every choice you make directly impacts your book's success in the marketplace. This is exactly why having a roadmap to follow before diving into self-publishing is so crucial. Just as you wouldn't build a house without blueprints, you shouldn't publish your novel without a clear plan of action.  That's exactly what I'm providing in this episode—a comprehensive 10-step guide that will transform your manuscript into a professionally published book readers will discover and enjoy. You’ll hear me talk about things like: [02:42] The critical mindset shift most first-time authors fail to make—and why adopting a publisher’s mindset is key to your self-publishing success[06:04] How to build out your publishing team (including why skimping on professional editing is the costliest mistake you can make)[11:51] Why you should start building your author platform and growing your email list now—even if your book isn’t entirely ready to publish just yet[21:19] How to decide which distribution channel is best for you and your book (and why this choice impacts everything from your marketing to sales)[25:49] How to develop a flexible pricing strategy that positions your novel correctly in the market while maximizing your revenue and/or reachWhether you’ve already set your sights on self-publishing or if you’ve been researching self-publishing only to feel more confused than ever, this episode will give you the clear, strategic roadmap you need to confidently self-publish your novel like a pro! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Your Self-Publishing Roadmap: 10 Steps To Self-Publishing a Novel (Free Guide)Ep. #83 - What Kind of Editor Do You Need For Your Book?Ep. #106 - 5 Steps To Building Your Author PlatformEp. #107 - Email List Building Essentials For AuthorsEp. 163 - How To Find & Work With A Book Cover Designer⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Learn how dictation is your secret weapon for capturing story ideas, supporting overall health, and writing up to 3,000 words per hour. Are you curious about how dictation can improve your health and mobility, enhance your natural storytelling flow, and revolutionize your time management—even if you've tried and failed at it before? Well, then, you'll love this episode with Sarah Elisabeth Sawyer. Sarah is an author who's published 19 books—11 of which she wrote entirely through dictation. She now teaches other writers how to do the same so that they can write faster, spend less time sitting at their computers, and overcome perfectionism that stops them from getting words on the page. Be sure to tune in. You'll hear us talk about things like: [03:33] Why Sarah failed at dictation for years and the surprising mindset shift that made everything click into place.   [06:40] The 3 unexpected benefits of dictation that have nothing to do with writing speed but will change how you think about it. [09:14] How Sarah captured 1,200 words in just 20 minutes while washing dishes (the scene that would've been lost forever). [15:48] Why your brain freezes when you try to dictate your fiction and exactly how to create those missing neural pathways. [25:43] The dead-simple "open bracket" trick for adding quick notes mid-sentence without breaking your creative flow. [31:40] The surprisingly simple text message exercise that retrains your brain for dictation even if you had trouble with it before.  Whether battling perfectionism, dealing with chronic pain, or just curious about dictation for writers, this episode gives you the practical steps to get started without expensive dictation software or complicated equipment. ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Check out Sarah’s Dictation + Scrivener Power Combo Mini-Course and use code FWME to get $50 off your purchase.Dictation For Authors Quickstart Guide (Free)Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover the five most common big-picture mistakes writers make in their first drafts—and learn exactly what you can do to fix them. Congratulations, you finished your first draft! …But now what? If you're feeling stuck or overwhelmed as you dive into editing your messy first draft, you're so not alone.  As a developmental editor, I've reviewed hundreds of first drafts, and I've noticed that most new writers struggle with the same core issues—problems that have nothing to do with your writing talent, but everything to do with fundamental story principles. In this episode, I’m sharing the 5 most common big-picture mistakes I see writers make in their first drafts (and exactly what you can do to fix them).  You'll hear me talk about things like: [00:00] How to figure out if your story starts in the right place (and the one simple question that can help you find the perfect spot to begin your first chapter)[00:00] The difference between meaningful conflict vs. random plot events—and why your protagonist’s transformation depends on this key storytelling element[00:00] How to fix weak narrative drive (aka the dreaded "so what?" problem that causes readers to abandon books), and how to create seamless scene-to-scene connections[00:00] Character development strategies for increasing emotional stakes in your novel without resorting to melodramatic plot twists or artificial tension[00:00] The one mistake that might make readers feel cheated at the end of your novel (even if they can't explain why), and how to fix itIf you've finished your first draft but feel something's not quite working, or if you're struggling to revise a manuscript that just doesn't seem to come together, this episode will give you the clarity and direction you need to transform your story! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Novel Editing Roadmap: 10 Steps To Editing Your First Draft (Free Guide)Ep. #13 - 5 Things That Kill Narrative Drive (& How To Fix It)Ep. #18 - 5 Mistakes Writers Make In Their Opening PagesEp. #118 - How To Find The Major Dramatic Question Of Your StoryEp. #145 - How To Develop Your Character’s BackstoryEp. #149 - 5 Questions To Develop Better AntagonistsWant my entire step-by-step process for brainstorming, outlining, and writing your first draft? Click here to learn more about my Notes to Novel program.⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover the five ways to talk about your story’s genre so you can write, edit, and publish your novel with clarity and confidence. Ever found yourself staring at a blinking cursor, excited about your story idea but utterly confused about how to describe its genre? 😩  This kind of uncertainty isn't just frustrating. It can have serious consequences for your writing, editing, and publishing journey. Here’s what you need to know: There are actually five different layers of genre that work together to describe your unique story. Think of this as your story's "genre DNA"—a description that gives readers a comprehensive picture of your work. Tune into this episode to learn: [02:22] How to determine if your novel is commercial, literary, or upmarket fiction—and why this positioning matters when writing, editing, and publishing[05:21] Why your story's time period affects everything from research requirements to character development (and what this means for fantasy authors whose stories often take place in their own temporal contexts)[07:32] How to select the appropriate age category for your target readers and why this critical decision shapes your word count, content, and marketing options[11:30] The different reality settings available for your story world and practical ways to manage worldbuilding without getting overwhelmed[18:15] How your story’s content genre can serve as your writing roadmap by defining the emotional experience readers expect from a story like yoursWhether you're drafting your first novel or preparing to query agents, this episode will help you define your story's genre so you can write with direction, revise with purpose, and market your book with confidence. ⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. #2 - How To Choose The Right Genre For Your StoryFree Worksheet: Discover Your Story’s Unique Genre DNASupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Congratulations! You've finished writing your first draft—an achievement that puts you ahead of countless aspiring writers who never make it past the dreaming stage.  But now you're staring at your manuscript, wondering, "What next?"  Maybe you've tried jumping straight into revisions only to find yourself overwhelmed, confused, or just plain stuck. Or maybe you’re just avoiding it altogether. If your excitement about finishing your draft has given way to editing anxiety, you're not alone. Every author—even the most seasoned professionals—reaches this crossroads, where the path forward seems foggy at best. Tune in to learn the exact novel editing framework that has helped my clients and students transform their messy drafts into completed manuscripts. You’ll hear me talk about things like: [06:21] The game-changing approach to organizing your editing notes that’ll prevent months of wasted time and getting stuck in "revision loops"[07:17] How mapping what you actually wrote (not what you intended to write) can expose the hidden strengths and weaknesses of your manuscript[10:05] The #1 mistake first-time novelists make when editing their messy first drafts (and how to avoid falling into this all too common trap)[16:05] The four-category sorting system that helps you prioritize feedback and make confident decisions about which changes to implement[23:22] How your publishing path impacts your editing to-do list (and which steps to take if you’re self-publishing or traditional publishing)If you've finally finished your first draft but find yourself paralyzed by the editing process, or if you've been revising the same chapters for months without making real progress, this episode gives you the clear, structured approach you need. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Novel Editing Roadmap: 10 Steps To Editing Your First Draft (Free Guide)Want my entire step-by-step process for brainstorming, outlining, and writing your first draft? Click here to learn more about my Notes to Novel program.⭐ Follow & Review If you loved this episode, please take a moment to follow the show and leave a review on Apple Podcasts! Your review will help other writers find this podcast and get the insights they need to finish their books. Thanks for tuning in to The Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast! See you next week! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover how a 72-year-old data scientist overcame perfectionism to publish her debut science fiction novel after decades of dreaming about it. Are you stuck with half-finished manuscripts or endlessly revising the same chapters? Does your story refuse to translate from your imagination to the page the way you envision it? You're not alone. The very perfectionism that drives you to write can become the biggest obstacle to finishing your novel. In this episode, Cheryl Arko shares her transformative journey from decades of false starts to published author at 72, revealing the exact strategies that helped her finally complete her science fiction novel after years of struggle. Tune in to hear: [14:31] The reverse outlining technique that revealed why Cheryl’s scenes weren't working (and exactly how to fix them) [17:47] How entering a writing competition boosted her confidence and validated her manuscript's potential (and earned her a finalist spot!) [20:39] The two-phase writing approach that freed Cheryl from perfectionism paralysis (and helped her make twice the progress in half the time) [29:35] How developing her antagonist into a more three-dimensional character solved plot problems Cheryl had been stuck on for months [35:01] The practical reasons Cheryl chose self-publishing at 72 (and how to decide what's right for you based on your timeline and goals)If you've ever abandoned a manuscript or worried it's too late to realize your writing dreams, this episode proves that with the right approach, you can finally type "The End" on your novel—no matter your age or how long you've been trying. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Cheryl Arko’s websiteBuy Cheryl’s book on AmazonEp. #40 - How to Write a Well-Structured Scene⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Five book coaches reveal their most powerful mindset hacks to help you crush self-doubt, overcome perfectionism, and finally finish your first draft—even if you've been stuck for months. Picture this: You sit down with a fresh cup of coffee, open your laptop to write your novel, and then that voice of doubt creeps in: "This is terrible. You don't know what you're doing." And then you're staring at a blinking cursor, completely frozen. Sound familiar? If you're nodding your head, you're not alone. Whether you're just starting your first novel or you've been trying to finish that draft for months (or years!), these mental roadblocks aren't signs of failure—they're normal challenges every writer faces. Tune in to this episode to hear five proven mindset strategies from professional book coaches and editors who have helped countless first-time novelists overcome writer's block, self-doubt, and procrastination to finally type "The End" on their first drafts. [02:11] The surprising mindset shift that turns "This writing is terrible" into productive writing sessions[08:41] How to carve out writing time that actually works (without quitting your day job or neglecting your family)[14:43] Why waiting to "feel inspired" is killing your novel—and the counterintuitive approach that actually works[20:12] The five simple questions that can rescue your story when you're stuck in the dreaded "middle slump"[27:08] How strategic "neglect" might be the missing ingredient to finally type "The End" on your manuscriptIf you're an aspiring author who is writing your first draft, or if you've started multiple manuscripts but keep getting stuck in the middle, this episode's for you! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get on the waitlist for my Notes to Novel course!Candace Coakley’s website and InstagramSam Henke’s website and InstagramJenny Luke’s website and InstagramKarla Diaz’s website and InstagramSam Cameron’s website and Instagram⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Master the art of the jaw-dropping plot twist and transform your readers from passive page-turners into gasping, can't-put-it-down fans. Ever gasped out loud while reading a thriller? That moment when everything flips upside down and you think, "I should have seen it coming!" 😱 That's the power of a well-crafted plot twist. Creating these goosebump-inducing moments isn't magic—it's a skill that any writer can master, even if you’re just starting out. And who better to learn from than someone whose superpower is brainstorming plot twists? Samantha Skal is the director of Thriller Fest, the co-founder of Shadows and Secrets Writing Retreats (held in Salem’s most haunted hotel!), and a certified Author Accelerator book coach specializing in mystery, thriller, and suspense. So to say she knows a thing or two about crafting plot twists would be an understatement. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [04:45] The difference between using red herrings in mysteries and thrillers(and why mixing them up might be killing your story's suspense)[07:11] Why "playing fair" with readers is the cardinal rule of plot twist writing—and how breaking it turns clever twists into manipulative disappointments[15:12] Why starting with your villain (not your protagonist) is the secret to crafting plot twists that are surprising yet inevitable[24:00] How your character's personal baggage can become your most powerful tool for misdirecting readers (without feeling manipulative)[40:45] The counterintuitive reason why vague storytelling kills suspense—and what to do instead to create maximum tensionWhether you're excited to start your first novel or stuck somewhere in the middle of a manuscript, wondering how to surprise your readers, this episode will help you craft plot twists that feel both surprising and inevitable.  ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Samantha Skal’s websiteShadows & Secrets RetreatsFreebie: 17 Thriller Twist Ideas to Jumpstart Your BrainstormingSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Writing your first novel is a journey unlike any other—equal parts exhilarating, frustrating, magical, and challenging. But here's what you need to know right now: it's completely doable with the right approach. Something I've discovered after working with hundreds of writers is that finishing a novel requires more than just talent or a great idea. It takes the right mindset, practical tools, and a strategic approach that keeps you moving forward even when inspiration fades. Tune in to learn the exact novel-writing framework that has helped my clients and students transform their ideas into completed manuscripts, with a special focus on the foundational elements that make stories truly resonate with readers. You’ll hear me talk about things like: [02:10] The #1 reason most first-time novelists abandon their manuscripts (spoiler alert: it's not writer's block)[13:25] Why understanding your protagonist's inner obstacle is the key to creating a page-turning novel[20:20] The simple 3-part story structure that successful authors use to prevent getting stuck in the dreaded "murky middle"[26:45] Which writing routines actually work for busy people (and why marathon writing sessions might be sabotaging your progress)[30:20] The psychological trick that transforms "someday" writers into authors who actually finish their first draft[32:50] Episode recap and final thoughtsIf you've been dreaming about becoming an author but find yourself staring at a blank page or blinking cursor, or if you've started multiple manuscripts only to abandon them when the going gets tough, then this episode is for you! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Your First Draft Roadmap: 10 Steps To Writing a Novel (Free Guide)Want my entire step-by-step process for brainstorming, outlining, and writing your first draft? Click here to learn more about my Notes to Novel program.⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Curious about writing books in more than one genre? Angela Haas shares a behind-the-scenes look at writing science fiction and romantic comedy! In today’s episode, we’re going behind the scenes of Angela Haas’s journey to hear how she self-published not one but two books in the last six months—one’s that’s a really fun space opera and the other that’s a romantic comedy. You’ll hear about her experience working with book editors, how she approaches the writing process as a die-hard pantser, and what made her choose self-publishing for all three of her books. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [06:50] What happened when Angela submitted her outline for feedback in an online writing course (it wasn’t mine!) and got negative feedback from the instructor who called her space opera story “spoofy”[13:45] How understanding this one writing technique (spoiler alert: it’s “show, don’t tell") helped improve the quality of Angela’s manuscripts, and what exactly made this tricky concept finally make sense[15:05] What made Angela (a die-hard pantser) finally embrace outlining—and what her unique approach to outlining looks like (spoiler alert: it’s flexible and creative, something all pantsers would love!)[17:45] What happened when Angela hired an editor who started re-writing passages from her story (and why this almost made her give up on writing altogether)[20:10] Why Angela decided to self-publish both of her books—including what she learned from researching traditional publishing and indie publishing and the factors that made her choose self-publishingIf you’re an aspiring author who dreams of self-publishing a novel to have more control over the creative process, you’re going to love this episode! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Angela Haas’s WebsiteAngela Haas on InstagramAngela Haas’s BooksThe Author Next Door Show⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“I want to write a dual timeline novel, but I’m struggling to weave the storylines together. Help!” 👈 This is something I hear from writers all the time. And while it’s true that writing a story with dual timelines presents its own set of challenges, the possibilities are often worth the effort. Tune in to this episode to learn the essential elements that make dual timeline novels work, common mistakes to avoid, and practical writing strategies you can use to write a dual timeline story that truly resonates with readers. In this episode, I cover things like: [03:00] The difference between true dual timeline stories and stories that use flashbacks to convey backstory—and why this distinction is so important[08:45] Two proven methods for arranging the chapters in your dual timeline novel, including the most common approach that works for all genres[11:25] Why creating a connection between timelines is so critical—and 5 specific ways to create meaningful connections between your timelines[18:00] How to keep readers engaged in your story no matter which timeline they’re in (and what to do if one of your timelines falls flat)[25:55] Final thoughts and episode recapIf you want to write a novel that has more than one timeline—or if you’re editing a novel with dual timelines—this is an episode you won’t want to miss! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to get instant access to our deep dive into The Invisible Life of Addie LaRue by V.E. Schwab to see how a dual timeline novel works!⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Curious about what it’s like to make the switch from writing for TV to writing books? Or maybe you want to learn writing tips from a screenwriter with decades of experience? Either way, you’re going to love this episode with Michael Jamin. Michael is a TV writer turned author who just published his collection of personal essays, A Paper Orchestra, in 2023. Since then, his book has won a Reedsy Discovery Editor’s Choice Award and has been named one of Vulture’s “Best Comedy Books of 2024.” Michael’s many credits include writing for King of the Hill, Beavis and Butt-Head, Just Shoot Me, Wilfred, Maron, Rules of Engagement, Out of Practice, Brickleberry, and Tacoma FD. And in this episode, he’s sharing what it was like making the switch from writing for TV to writing his first book. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [03:53] What it was like making the switch from writing for TV to writing his debut memoir—including how Michael’s background in TV both helped and hindered his memoir-writing[12:13] The two main reasons Michael’s book died on submission—despite having an agent who loved his book (spoiler alert: it came down to not having a platform and his manuscript lacking a throughline)[14:52] Why Michael decided to self-publish, plus what he learned while researching the differences between traditional and indie publishing[18:08] How Michael built his audience on Instagram to almost 200k followers by being authentic and sharing his knowledge[24:17] Michael's two cents on writing comedy, including some of the most common mistakes writers make when trying to write comedyEven if you can’t relate to Michael’s TV background, you’ll still get a ton of value from this episode. He knows what it’s like to struggle through your first book—and he’s a great example of what happens if you don’t give up! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: A Paper Orchestra by Michael JaminMichael Jamin’s Website & InstagramHow my self-published book became one of Vulture's "Best Comedy Books of 2024"What The Hell Is Michael Jamin Talking About?Unwritten by Michael Jamin⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Calling all Romantasy (and Fantasy) authors! Tune in to learn how to write a Romantasy novel that perfectly blends fantasy elements with romance. Whether you're drafting your first Romantasy novel or refining your approach to an existing manuscript, this episode will help you deliver exactly what readers are looking for in this booming genre. Tune in for a deep dive into the Romantasy genre and learn things like: [01:35] Key differences between books like Fourth Wing, Radiance, and The Name of The Wind, and why only two of these would be marketed as Romantasy, despite having many similar elements [05:24] What the Romantasy genre spectrum looks like—and why knowing where your story fits on this spectrum changes everything about how you write it [10:55] How to navigate the thematic differences between “Fantasy Romance” (focused on love's power) versus “Romantic Fantasy” (centered on survival) [18:22] How to craft character relationships that resonate differently depending on your subgenre—and why this matters more than you think [22:15] Worldbuilding strategies specific to each end of the Romantasy spectrum that will keep readers immersed in your story and coming back for more If you’ve ever wondered why some Romantasy novels feel like epic adventures with a dash of romance while others are more like swoon-worthy love stories with magical elements, this episode will help clear out some of that confusion. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 145 - How To Develop Your Character's BackstoryEp. 7 - 5 Questions To Help You Write Better CharactersEp. 23 - The 6 Key Scenes Every Romance Novel NeedsEp. 38 - Romance Genre ConventionsEp. 41 - The 6 Key Scenes Every Action Story NeedsEp. 57 - Action Genre Key Scenes⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Romantasy and Fantasy authors! Tune in to learn how the opening pages of House of Earth and Blood hooks readers and pulls them into the rest of the story. Join me and Abigail K. Perry for a deep dive into the opening chapter of the first Crescent City book, House of Earth and Blood, to find out how and why it works.  We analyze this first chapter from both a macro and micro perspective to see what kind of promise it makes to the reader, how the author introduces us to the story world, and to figure out why we care so much about these fictional characters. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about: [03:08] A quick summary of the first chapter of House of Earth and Blood, including our thoughts on why the author started the story here[05:05] A big-picture analysis of the first chapter to see what kind of promise it makes to the reader (this part’s really fun because Abigail has NOT read the books, so tune in and hear what she picked up on!)[25:50] What it means to write a story with a steep learning curve—and why understanding your target audience makes a big difference when it comes to creating a fictional world for your story[38:50] A deep-dive into the scene structure within the opening chapter (spoiler alert: the scene continues into chapter two—tune in to hear how we landed here)[47:26] Why it’s so important to have “on the surface” excitement and action when planting clues and setting things up in your opening chaptersWhether you’re writing fantasy, romantasy, or any kind of story that requires world-building, this episode will change how you look at your opening chapter. Plus, you’ll get a fantastic peek at how Sarah J. Maas wrote another bestselling fantasy series (so you can do the same when writing your own novel). 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 96 - 5 Worldbuilding Tips for Sci-Fi and Fantasy WritersCheck out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry here! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Discover how a debut author turned her first novel into an Amazon #1 bestseller using strategic marketing tactics instead of relying on social media. Meet Margaret Mantor, a science-fantasy romance author from Denver whose novel Air And Ashes hit Amazon's bestseller list one month after launch. Tune in to hear us talk about why giving away books for free can lead to more sales, how to use BookBub promotions and newsletter features to skyrocket your Amazon rankings, and why using social media to promote your book doesn’t always work. Episode Highlights  [03:45] Meet Margaret, a science-fantasy romance author from Denver [05:03] Celebrating becoming an Amazon bestseller one month after launch [05:51] How Margaret's high school story idea became an Amazon bestseller [07:24] Working with a developmental editor and handling feedback [13:35] The revision process: Beta readers, line editors, and proofreaders [18:26] Why Margaret chose self-publishing vs. traditional publishing [20:33] Book marketing strategies that actually worked without social media [26:55] Key lessons learned and best advice for aspiring authors [34:35] Looking ahead to book 2 and how it’s already better If you’re an aspiring fiction author who wants to successfully self-publish your book (without using social media to market it), this episode is for you! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Visit Margaret Mantor’s websiteMargaret Mantor on Instagram & TikTokBuy Air And Ashes by Margaret Mantor⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Chronic illness teaches you about pain, loss, and resilience. Find out why this can make you a better storyteller. Writing a novel can feel impossible when managing a chronic illness. Symptoms, brain fog, and advice that doesn't fit your life can make you wonder if you'll ever finish your story. But your experience with chronic illness also gives you a rare edge that empowers you to connect with readers on a much deeper level. That's why I'm so excited to introduce you to Sandra Postma. She's a certified book coach who works with writers facing chronic illnesses. Sandra brings such warmth and kindness to this conversation, shaped by her own 20-year journey with chronic illness and writing.  In this episode, Sandra and I talk about turning your chronic illness into your secret weapon for storytelling, finding writing strategies that honor your body, and giving yourself permission to write in a way that works for you. Here’s what we cover:  [04:55] The top three challenges writers with chronic illnesses face and why traditional writing advice doesn't always work. [14:28] How to create a writing routine that’s right for you and your body, even if it breaks a few common rules. [16:13] Why your chronic illness can be the key to connecting with your readers on a raw, emotional level. [27:30] Understanding the difference between ‘clean pain’ and ‘dirty pain’ and how this writing mindset shift supports you when things get tough. [33:01] Why it’s okay for your writing journey to take as long as it needs—and how to make peace with your pace. Whether you're starting your first draft or deep into your novel, this conversation will help you find your own path to storytelling—one that pays tribute to your creativity and well-being. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Sandra’s Website & InstagramFree Guide: How To Write When You Have A Chronic Illness⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Romance, historical fiction & fantasy writers—tune in to learn how the opening pages of Outlander hook readers into the story.  In this listener-voted episode, I team up with developmental editor and book coach Abigail K. Perry to analyze the opening chapter of Diana Gabaldon's genre-defying masterpiece, Outlander, on a macro and micro level.  And truth be told, this might be one of our most challenging chapter analyses yet, but you'll learn exactly what makes these opening pages super engaging so you can apply it to your own writing. Here’s what we cover: [07:13] An Outlander chapter summary that reveals how Gabaldon masterfully sets up relationship tension and an interesting open loop that becomes hugely important later. [13:05] A chapter one macro analysis using the seven questions from Paula Munier’s book, The Writer’s Guide To Beginnings, to break down what makes this opening so spot-on (from genre to character to stakes). [39:50] How Gabaldon built Outlander's plot around three major story peaks to keep readers glued to the page. (I found this gem on her website and had to share it with you.) [43:01] A microanalysis of the two scenes within the first chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from Shawn Coyn's book, The Story Grid—to learn how to make your quiet moments as compelling as the action-packed ones. [56:33] A discussion on how to write tricky relationship moments and emotional turning points in a way that feels natural and not forced.  Whether you're writing historical fantasy, time travel romance, historical romance, or any genre-bending story, you'll get a fantastic overview of how Diana Gabaldon crafted an opening chapter that launched a global phenomenon (so you can do the same for your own novel).  Tune in now.  🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry here! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Got writer's block and convinced it's because you lack talent? Think again! And I have the solution that'll change the way you approach your writing… If you're struggling to finish your novel, I want you to know that your lack of progress has nothing to do with your capabilities or the quality of your ideas. In fact, it boils down to an imbalance of three essential things—or pillars of novel creation, if you will. In this week's episode, I'm sharing what these three things are so you can overcome writing roadblocks and finish your novel in 2025. These three things helped Jenny finish her draft in 6 months (after being stuck for 12 years) and gave Laura the confidence to move past self-doubt and finish her 83,000-word fantasy story. Here’s what I talk about:  [03:43] Your secret roadmap to avoid the endless planning loop where you waste months (or even years) trying to make everything perfect. [10:01] The most overlooked part of successfully writing a first draft, which many people ignore, and how to leverage it when self-doubt kicks in. [15:36] The technical piece of the writing puzzle and why even beautiful prose won't help if the other two pieces aren't in place. And so much more… If you're ready to stop spinning your wheels and start making real progress on your story, grab your headphones, turn the volume up, and press play. This could be the writing breakthrough you've been waiting for. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to learn more about my signature program Notes to Novel™—and join us for the next LIVE cohort before doors close on January 30th, 2025.Ep. 88 - Perfectionism vs. Procrastination: What's REALLY Going On?Ep. 123 - How To Overcome The 5 Types Of Imposter SyndromeEp. 134 - How To Stop Procrastinating: 5 Productivity Tips For Writers⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

See how Notes to Novel™ helped these five writers go from a blank page to a story that works (without the overwhelm). With Notes to Novel™ (season 6) right around the corner, I'm bringing you something incredibly special today. I'm chatting with five amazing writers from season 5 about their experience inside the course. And let me tell you, they're in the trenches right now, actively working on their novels. Some have finished their outlines, while others are deep in the drafting phase, and one has already completed her manuscript! This is what we talk about:  [02:55] How Katherine finished the “cleanest draft” she’s ever written (at 72k words) in only 3 months—and then went on to edit that same draft in just 8 weeks [09:47] How the Notes to Novel framework helped Kay stay focused on what *really* mattered in her story (and avoid chasing every new shiny object idea that popped into her head) [15:27] What happened when I suggested one of my students, Danyel, eliminate one of her two point-of-view characters during one of our live Q&A calls [21:35] How Harlow used her genre’s key scenes to create an outline (and why this made outlining much more approachable) [27:47] And finally, how Madi wrote her first draft in 6 months (despite being a super busy mom of four)—plus her thoughts on the overall vibe and atmosphere of the group coaching aspect So, if you’re feeling stuck, flustered, or unsure about your writing process, these 5 Notes to Novel students show you what's possible when you have the right tools and support. Enjoy the episode! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get on the Notes to Novel™ waitlist Katherine Varley’s website and ThreadsKay Aprea’s InstagramDanyel Nicole’s website and InstagramHarlow Black’s InstagramMadison Unruh’s Instagram⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Feel stuck writing your novel? These 5 time management strategies will squash all productivity blocks to get your story finished—finally (and fast). Why does finding the time to write feel so hard sometimes? We often blame our busy schedules (and yes, that's definitely part of it). But there's something else lurking around that stops your writing progress. And it has a way of making you feel like you're failing at this whole writing thing. Which is so not true. In this episode, I'm pulling back the curtain on this sneaky (and very hidden) productivity block that keeps tripping you up. Plus, I'm sharing 5 powerful time management strategies to squash this writing bottleneck so you can finish your novel in 2025. You’ll hear me talk about things like: [03:35] The hidden truth about "not enough time" that's actually blocking your writing progress (and how to fix it). [06:04] A simple ‘chunking method’ that reduces writing overwhelm and turns your sessions into productive, dopamine-fueled wins. [10:45] The editing habit that's stealing your momentum, and most writers don't see it coming. [22:28] A fun way to outsmart your brain into showing up for your writing (hello, guilt-free rewards!) [26:26] An energy-mapping trick that leverages your best creative flow state to get more writing done in less time. And so much more… You've got a story inside you that deserves to be told, and 2025 is your year to hold that finished novel in your hands. Whether it's your debut or your next book in a growing series—your writing journey is too important to let productivity barriers hold you back. You've got this, and I'm here to help. Enjoy this episode, and make sure to grab your free time management guide in the links section below to start implementing these strategies today. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 134 - How To Stop Procrastinating: 5 Productivity Tips For WritersFree Pomodoro TimerGrab the free Time Management Guide for authors here! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

The best writing advice sticks with us because it changes our thinking about our craft. In this special year-end episode, I'm counting down the top 10 most powerful tips from Fiction Writing Made Easy in 2024—from crafting sizzling character chemistry and developing compelling antagonists to building immersive story worlds and mastering your character's backstory.  Plus, learn how to overcome writer's block and tap into the power of the writing community to fuel your creative success. Let's celebrate the juicy nuggets that helped writers (like you) level up their storytelling this year. In the episode, you’ll hear me talk about things like: [01:42] Mastering point of view fundamentals with Gabriela Pereira's "sphere of knowledge" technique—perfect for writers second-guessing their narrative perspective.[06:58] Learn how to create unforgettable ‘on-the-page’ chemistry and romantic tension with our in-depth analysis of the #1 New York Times bestseller Fourth Wing. Plus, I talk about the 3 sizzling ingredients that make readers fall head over heels in love with your characters.[08:54] Transform your story antagonist from flat to fascinating using the Harry Potter series as our guide. See how Voldemort's clear goals and plans create organic, gripping conflict that drives the entire story.[12:34] Break free from writer's block forever with April Davila's mindset-shifting strategy. Learn why this common creative obstacle might not be what you think—and how to overcome it.[18:36] Learn how to craft a story world that grows with your series, featuring examples from the #1 New York Times bestseller A Court of Thorns and Roses. Discover how your story world can evolve to create deeper story arcs and richer series development.[26:48] I'm so excited to share tip #1 with you. My chat with Save the Cat! expert Jessica Brody was your absolute favorite episode of 2024—and once you hear this perspective on story structure, you'll understand why. Trust me, this tip is a total game-changer.And that's just a taste of our special year-end top 10 tip countdown. I'm so excited to share these writing tips with you—they're genuinely some of my favorites from this year!  So, cozy up with your favorite writing snacks, and let's celebrate the best writing advice of 2024 together. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Click here to view the episode page with all the links  Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Is the thought of revising your first draft making you nauseous? I got you. These mindset tips will ease revision anxiety for good.  It's one thing to pour your heart into writing a first draft. However, facing revisions and sharing your story with others can feel raw, uncomfortable, and downright scary. Not to worry. Every writer struggles with this novel writing phase, and that's why I've brought together four brilliant book coaches and editors to share their mindset wisdom to make the first draft revision process less scary and more exciting.  Here's what we talk about: [02:48] Why you should absolutely love your "hot mess" first draft—it's exactly what it needs to be right now. [08:01] The right (and wrong) people to ask for first draft feedback and how to prepare yourself emotionally for their response. [12:40] A practical approach to handling hard-to-hear feedback so that it feels less personal and more purposeful. [19:05] A unique 3-step revision process that transforms how you think about your first draft to turn it into a ‘must-read’ success.  [22:59] Why comparing your revision journey to other writers only holds you back—and what to focus on instead. Tune into this episode to discover how to shift your mindset from revision fear to revision readiness. You'll walk away with practical strategies that make revisions less overwhelming, feedback less personal, and the entire process more purposeful. And this is precisely what you need to turn your first draft into a story readers love. 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Stacy Frazer’s website and InstagramMichelle Regenold’s website and InstagramLeslie Horn’s website and YouTubeCaryn DeVincenti’s website and Instagram⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Want a sneak peek into my life as a developmental editor and book coach? Listen in and find out what I do in my work week to help authors transform their story ideas into fully realized novels. I'll walk you through what I'm learning, how I support fiction writers in finishing their novels, and my exciting plans for 2025. Plus, I'll share all the behind-the-scenes moments that make my book coach life so rewarding. So, pour yourself a coffee (or matcha tea) and join me as I share: [02:40] How the recording of my first audiobook is currently going and what I’m doing to keep my voice intact with all the talking. [07:25] Why I pull out 12 blank calendar pages every December and how this simple planning ritual shapes my entire year ahead. [10:15] What I learned working with two writers—a romance author and a sci-fi author—who started roughly at the same time but took completely different paths to reach the line editing phase simultaneously. [22:42] Inside my final Notes To Novel coaching call and how these amazing writers have gained the confidence to take their ideas, turn them into outlines, and start writing noteworthy novels.  [27:10] The fascinating results from my annual listener survey shaping my 2025 content (Hint: you're in great company if you're still working on your debut novel or yet to start.) Thanks for coming along on this journey with me! I love sharing little glimpses into my world with you. Whether you're still simmering your first story idea or deep in revisions, I hope this behind-the-scenes peek gives you a real sense of my life as a developmental editor and book coach. See you next week! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Get on the waitlist for updates on The Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide to Harry Potter and the Chamber of Secrets here!Ep. 164 - Student Spotlight: Why She Ditched Her Agent And Self-Published Her Debut Novel With Stefanie MedrekEp. 166 - Student Spotlight: How Jennifer Lauer Sold 5,000+ Copies of Her Debut Novel in 18 Months (Without a Massive Social Media Following)Just Food For DogsSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Need help with tone and mood in your novel writing? Maybe your scenes aren't hitting the right emotional notes, or your story atmosphere feels off. Today, we're breaking down four practical ways to master these tricky writing elements to keep your readers hooked. In this episode, I'm chatting with Isobelle Lans, a UK-based author, editor, and writing coach who runs Inspired Creative Co. With years of experience helping writers develop their storytelling skills, Isobelle knows exactly how to break down tricky writing elements (like tone and mood) that often feel nebulous or hard to grasp. Tune into this episode to hear us talk about the four essential techniques for mastering tone and mood in your writing. We talk about specific word choices that create the perfect atmosphere, the power of internal monologue, how setting plays a massive role, and sentence structure that strengthens your story's emotional impact. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [02:21] The difference between tone and mood—Isobelle clears up the confusion between these two essential writing elements (and why understanding the difference will improve your storytelling).[03:40] Why do tone and mood matter for your novel genre? We share what happened when one romance writer got it wrong—and how you can get it right in your own novel.[05:01] Four brilliant ways to create a powerful, emotionally-driven atmosphere in your story. We dig into these hands-on techniques to help your readers feel precisely what you want them to feel.[13:00] When should you focus on tone and mood during the writing process? Isobelle explains whether this is a first draft problem or something to focus on in revisions.[17:09] The biggest tone and mood pitfalls Isobelle sees as an editor and writing coach. Plus, her straightforward advice to ensure your story delivers the emotional punch you're aiming for.If you're ready to nail tone and mood in your writing, this episode is packed with practical techniques you can start using right away to keep your readers emotionally invested from start to finish. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Free Download: 10 Ways New Writers Can Enhance Their StorytellingIsobelle Lans at Inspired Creative CoIsobelle Lans on InstagramSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Whether you want complete creative freedom, better royalties, or a faster speed to market—get the clarity you need to choose the right publishing path for your novel. Your novel is (or nearly) complete; now it's time to choose your publishing path. Whether you're drawn to big traditional publishing with major bookstore distribution, love the creative control of self-publishing, want bigger royalties with hybrid publishing, or are interested in the boutique experience of publishing through a small press, this episode will help you get clear on the perfect publishing path for you and your story. In this week's episode, I'm joined by Nicole Meier, an author turned developmental editor and book coach who brings a unique perspective to the publishing conversation. With four published novels under her belt—released through both traditional and hybrid publishers—Nicole knows firsthand what it takes to navigate the publishing world and make the choices that best serve you. This is what we talk about… [04:27] How to get clear on the publishing path that suits your values and needs instead of following what everyone thinks you should do.  [10:28] A complete pro and con breakdown of traditional publishing, self-publishing, hybrid publishing, and small press publishing to help you make the right choice. [17:01] The big publishing mistake most authors make without even realizing it and how to ensure it doesn't happen to you. [28:46] What life after publishing looks like and why Nicole's first book became her readers' absolute favorite. [32:31] A sneak peek reveal of Nicole’s brand new project that's going to make the fiction publishing journey so much easier for writers.  [33:26] Why building your author platform and book marketing matters more than ever when pitching agents and getting exposure. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Nicole Meier’s Website & InstagramNicole’s Podcast Steps To StoryBookWorks.coSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Finally, finish your book with effective writing strategies designed to work in harmony with your neurodivergent mind. Does sitting down to write your book feel impossible on some days, while on other days, you can write for hours on end? Maybe you feel guilty whenever someone says, "Real writers write every day" or "Just stick to a routine,"—but here's the thing—your neurodivergent brain may not work that way. And that's totally okay. In this episode, I've brought together four amazing writing coaches and book editors who either specialize in working with neurodivergent authors and ADHD writers or are neurodivergent themselves. And they’re here to share their best writing tips for finishing your book.  Even if you're not neurodivergent, you'll want to tune in because these writing strategies are pure gold. Here’s what we talk about: [02:55] How to tap into your natural neurodivergent energy cycles (from intense hyperfocus to foggy days) so that these energy cycles become your writing superpower. [09:16] Why there's nothing wrong with your neurodivergent writing process just because it’s different from the standard writing advice (or what others say you should do.) [16:08] What to do when writing suddenly feels impossible because your brain sees it as a demand instead of a choice. [22:06] Discover the magic of having an accountability partner in your corner who understands your unique writing process and celebrates progress on your terms. [27:57] Why breaking your writing time into small, manageable chunks can help you finally finish your book without the overwhelm. Tune into this episode to discover how to write your book in a way that honors your neurodivergent mind, celebrates your unique creative rhythms, and turns writing rules into gentle guidelines that actually work for your brain. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Alyssa Pfingst’s WebsiteDani Abernathy’s Website & InstagramGeorgina Green’s Website & InstagramKerry Savage’s Website & InstagramSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

If you’re serious about becoming a published author, determining your novel’s genre is one of the most important things you’ll have to do. But sometimes that’s easier said than done, especially if your book toes the line between Women’s Fiction and Romance. In this episode, I’m going to walk you through the difference between Women’s Fiction and Romance so you can write the best book possible and snag the attention of both agents and readers alike. You'll learn things like: [02:12] Five different ways to talk about the genre of your story (and why it’s so important to know where your book fits in the market)[04:18] How to tell the difference between Women’s Fiction and Romance—and why this difference really boils down to just one thing[07:53] The key characteristics of a Romance novel—including my thoughts on romance genre tropes and creating sizzling character chemistry[11:52] The defining traits of a Women’s Fiction novel (and how to develop your story’s plot when these stories tend to be so character-driven)[19:13] Episode recap and final thoughtsIf you’ve ever struggled to understand the difference between Women’s Fiction and Romance, this is an episode you won’t want to miss! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Download the Women’s Fiction vs. Romance Cheat SheetEp. 2 - Genre: The Key To Writing A Story That WorksEp. 23 - The 6 Key Scenes Every Romance NeedsEp. 38 - Romance Genre ConventionsEp. 46 - The 6 Scenes Every Worldview Novel NeedsEp. 25 - Worldview Genre ConventionsEp. 84 - The 6 Scenes Every Status Story NeedsEp. 70 - Status Genre ConventionsBook Club Replay: Lessons In Chemistry by Bonnie GarmusSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“When should I start marketing my book?” This is a question I get asked all the time! Along with other similar questions like, “Do I need to build an email list?” And “What are some effective ways to market my book?” My guest, Lacy Lieffers of Black Fox Marketing, is here to answer all of these questions (and more) in this podcast episode! Tune into this episode to hear us talk about why marketing matters from day one, how to think about book marketing throughout the entire writing, editing, and publishing process, and so much more. We’ll also cover things like: [04:59] Why it’s important to start your book marketing efforts early—and how integrating marketing into your writing process from day one can set you up for long-term success[05:33] What to do if you feel overwhelmed by book marketing (and how to avoid spinning your wheels, wasting a bunch of time and money)[10:28] Lacy shares her thoughts on the age-old debate of growing your social media versus growing your email list and tells you exactly where to spend your time and energy to make the most impact[11:08] How to flip the script on what it means to work with book influencers (spoiler alert: stop making everything all about you!)[25:22] How to build your author brand in a way that resonates with readers and sets you (and your books) apart in a crowded market[33:52] A few of Lacy’s favorite tactics for creating buzz around your book (and later, driving sales during your book launch) I LOVED this conversation with Lacy because she’s so knowledgeable and passionate about book marketing—and no wonder, with over 16 years of experience helping authors build their personal brands and market their books! If you’ve ever felt overwhelmed or uncertain about book marketing, you’re going to love this episode! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Black Fox MarketingLacy Lieffers on InstagramGrab Lacy’s Book Launch Playbook here!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Selling 5,000+ copies of a debut novel in 18 months (without a massive social media following) might seem out of reach to most aspiring authors. But, in fact, it’s not. And our incredible podcast guest, Jennifer Lauer, is here to show you how it's done. When we last spoke, Jennifer was on the brink of launching her debut sci-fi novel, The Girl in the Zoo. Fast-forward to today, and she's sold over 5,000 copies, launched a successful fiction podcast, and released a new paranormal mystery novella series. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [05:01] Jennifer's honest breakdown of book launch setbacks, including how she handled unexpected Amazon delays and a COVID diagnosis[07:49] How Jennifer leveraged NetGalley to rack up over 200 Amazon reviews and 250 Goodreads reviews—and why she says it was worth braving the potential for harsh feedback[10:57] Jennifer's persistence in securing BookBub features for international and US markets that drove her novel to #1 on multiple Amazon lists[21:48] How Jennifer sold just over 5,000 copies in 18 months with minimal social media presence (plus, the importance of releasing your work, even if it's imperfect, and how this mindset contributed to her success)[28:03] How Jennifer's fiction podcast, The Strange Chronicles, helped her overcome writer's block and draft her latest novella in one summer[38:24] The marketing plans for Jennifer's new series launch, including which strategies she's keeping, which she's ditching, and why influencer boxes might not be worth the hypeWhether you're gearing up to launch your first novel or looking to breathe new life into your backlist, this episode is packed with actionable strategies you can use today. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 85 - Student Spotlight: How She Overcame Her Fear of the Blank Page (and Indie Published Her Novel) with Jennifer LauerJennifer Lauer's Website & InstagramStart Somewhere by Jennifer LauerSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

It’s no secret that one of the biggest roadblocks to getting traditionally published is the dreaded literary agent rejection. But to find the right literary agent for you and your story, you have to go through the process of querying a handful of agents—which means you should expect to get a handful of rejections before finding your perfect match. In this episode, I’m sharing the three most common literary agent rejection scenarios and, more importantly, what you can do in each scenario to take the next steps and keep moving forward with your querying journey. Tune into this episode to hear things like: [02:04] What it means to get a form rejection letter from a literary agent (and why this does NOT mean you should give up on your publishing goals)[05:21] The next steps to take if an agent requests your full manuscript (or some sample pages) but then still doesn’t offer you representation[05:46] What literary agents are looking for in your opening pages—and how to determine if you might be missing any of the elements they’re looking for[10:42] What it means to get a “Revise & Resubmit” request from a literary agent (and more importantly, what NOT to do if you get one)[12:38] 5 signs you should stop querying—including my answer to the commonly asked question, “How long should I query agents before giving up?”If you’ve ever wondered how to interpret the rejection letters you’re receiving (or how to take action on the rejection letters you’re receiving), you’re going to love this episode! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 58 - 10 Querying Mistakes (& How To Avoid Them)Ep. 142 - How To Write A Query Letter That WorksFirst 5 Pages Workshop: How To Hook Readers In Your First 5 PagesSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Ever wonder what happens when you ditch your agent and decide to self-publish instead? This episode is a must-listen if you're curious about the ins and outs of self-publishing and how it can possibly safeguard your creative control.  In this episode, Stefanie Medrek is back on the podcast—and boy, has her story changed! The last time we chatted, she had just landed an agent and was about to go out on submission. But now she's releasing her debut romantic suspense novel as a self-published author. So what happened? Tune in to hear why Stefanie parted ways with her agent, how she navigated the world of self-publishing, and what it's like to prepare for a self-published book launch (happening this week).  In the episode, you’ll hear things like: [07:39] A recap of Stefanie's journey since our last chat: from landing an agent to trusting her gut instinct and choosing self-publishing over traditional publishing for creative control.[16:00] The nitty-gritty production details involved in preparing a book for self-publishing (including the cover design mistake that led to a complete do-over)[24:02] The unexpected challenges (and absolute joys) of self-publishing, how she's learning to roll with the punches, and manage delays.[26:43] How Stefanie tackled book marketing, including working with a fantastic PR firm and creating special edition ARCs (advanced reader copies), and her super-savvy strategies to reach readers and build buzz for her book launch. [33:00] The importance of building an author email list and a smart reader magnet to connect with your audience (and why this matters for your book launch).[37:35] The heartwarming story of Stefanie's dad, a successful self-published author, his influence on her publishing journey, and how they celebrate each other's milestones.If you've ever felt unsure about which publishing path to take, or if you're just curious about what goes on behind a self-published book launch, you'll LOVE this episode! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Into the Fire by Stefanie MedrekStefanie’s WebsiteStefanie on InstagramEp. 71 - Student Spotlight: How She Wrote a Novel in 6 Months (and Landed an Agent 10 Months Later) with Stefanie MedrekSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

You finished your book and now you’re looking for a cover designer, but where do you start? Where can you find a good book cover designer? And how much should you expect to pay them for a quality book cover? These are all questions my guest, Zoe Norvell, will answer in this week’s brand-new podcast episode! Zoe is the mastermind behind INeedABookCover.com and INeedABookInterior.com—and she’s been designing book covers professionally since 2011 (both for big publishers and self-published authors alike).  Tune into this episode to hear us talk about things like: [06:33] The very first step soon-to-be-published authors need to take when it comes to finding and working with a book cover designer[08:14] Why searching on Amazon for book cover inspiration isn’t a good idea—and what Zoe recommends doing instead (spoiler alert: you’ll love it!)[13:19] The difference between book cover designers and graphic designers, and Zoe’s thoughts on hiring designers from sites like Fiverr [25:30] Tips for what to consider when hiring a book cover designer, including things like how much to budget for your book cover [31:13] A fill-in-the-blank template to use when you reach out to your dream book cover designer (plus Zoe’s insights on what not to say in your email)If you’ve ever wanted a clear answer to some of the most important book cover design questions, you’re going to love this episdoe with Zoe Norvell. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Grab the free email template hereINeedABookCover.comINeedABookInterior.comZoe Norvell on InstagramSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

One of the questions I get asked by a lot of aspiring authors is, “What books should I read to learn how to start writing a novel?” I get asked this question so often that I decided to turn my answer into a podcast episode! Tune in to this episode to hear my take on the 5 best writing books that have had the biggest impact on me and the authors I work with. I’ll share what the books are, why I like them, and what kind of writer they’d be best for. In other words, you’ll hear me talk about: [02:03] My favorite book for character creation—one that helps you dig deep into your character’s backstory to understand who they are and how they’ll show up on the page[05:28] The first book that really made things click for me, including things like how to write a well-structured scene and the importance of genre[08:23] One of the best books on plotting a novel that includes beat-by-beat breakdowns of ten different stories—yep, I’m talking about Save the Cat![10:53] The only book I know of that breaks down an entire story on a scene-by-scene basis and shows you how every single part of the story works[15:09] A book that really changed the way I think about a story’s midpoint—not only what a midpoint is, but why it’s so important to the overall narrativeIf you’re looking for another craft book to add to your TBR pile (that can also make you a better writer), you’re going to love this episode! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Savannah Gilbo on InstagramStory Genius by Lisa CronThe Story Grid by Shawn CoyneSave the Cat! Writes A Novel by Jessica BrodyWrite Your Novel From The Middle by James Scott BellThe Story Grid Masterwork Guide to Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone by Savannah GilboSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Have you ever Googled things like “how many words should be in a novel?” Or “how many scenes should a novel have?” If so, you’ve probably gotten answers like “80,000 words.” Or “somewherre between 40 and 60 scenes.” Easy enough, in theory…But if you’re like most of the writers I’ve worked with, you’ve probably also had trouble sticking to these guidelines because there’s just so much stuff that needs to go into a novel, right? Well, in this episode, I’m going to help clear up some of the confusion and overwhelm that many writers face when it comes to outlining, writing, and revising. And to do that, I’m going to share everything I know about scene beats. Tune into this episode to hear things like: [03:18] The difference between scenes and beats, including some of the common functions beats can serve within each one of your scenes[07:21] An example of beats within a scene from Throne Of Glass by Sarah J. Maas—including a look at how she strategically placed chapter breaks to hook and hold the reader’s attention.[12:53] My advice on when to worry about the beats with each of your scenes (spoiler alert: it’s not until you’re in the revision phase—if at all!)[13:42] 3 things to look out for when deciding if something should be a beat or a scene, and why it’s super important to adopt a flexible mindset during revisions[16:09] Episode recap and final thoughts If you’ve ever felt overwhelmed creating your outline or trying to fit an entire story into a certain number of words or scenes, you’re going to love this episode! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 153 - Scene Analysis: Chapter 5 "Diagon Alley" From Harry Potter and the Sorcerer's StoneThrone of Glass by Sarah J. MaasClick here to grab a copy of my book, The Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide to Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s StoneEp. 40 - How to Write a Well-Structured SceneSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

How do you know if you’re actually getting better at writing? In this episode, my guest, Tim Grahl, the CEO of Story Grid and the author of multiple books, both fiction and non-fiction, shares his answer to this question. Tim believes that his new book, The S******d, is the best book he’s ever written—and I happen to agree with him! So, how did he get here? What did he do to become a better writer? And more importantly, what can YOU learn from Tim’s story to become a better writer yourself?  Tune into this episode to hear things like: [04:26] Where the idea for Tim’s new novel, The S******d, came from, and how he blended real life with fiction to create a compelling story[13:18] How Tim went from brainstorming to finished draft in about six months—and why spending time upfront to plan the foundational elements of the story saved him a ton of time (and stress) in the long run[15:15] Tim shares what he believes to be the secret to writing the best book he’s ever written (spoiler alert: it’s learning how to write a really good scene!)[32:46] Tim’s plans for launching and marketing this book—you won’t want to miss this part. Tim is the book launch guy, and his insights are golden!If you’ve ever wondered what it takes to become a better writer—and what you can do to practice your craft in a meaningful way—then you’re going to love this episode! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Free Download: 3-Point Scene Writing ChecklistStory Grid’s YouTube ChannelStory Grid’s WebsiteTim’s Book The ShitheadSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Want a peek behind the scenes into my work week? 👀 In this episode, I’m taking you behind the scenes and sharing what I do as a developmental editor and book coach.  I’ll talk through the projects I’m working on, what I’m excited (or not excited) about, what’s coming up in the next few weeks, what I learn from the writers I work with, and basically anything else that happens during the week! Tune into the episode to hear me talk about things like: [01:55] How I use a paper planner to map out my work week—and why I’m extra diligent about matching up my digital calendar to my planner[04:55] Why grouping common activities into one day (like public speaking or podcasting) helps me conserve energy and recharge my introvert batteries[08:30] An update on two writers I’m working with—both of which are about to finish their developmental edits and move into the line editing phase[14:50] How I deal with not getting everything on my to-do list done, and why it’s so important to give yourself grace when energy levels are low[16:40] What I learned from critiquing the opening pages of five different science fiction novels—and what you can do to avoid making the same mistakeThanks for coming on this journey with me, and I hope you enjoy this peek behind the scenes! See you next week! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 94 - How to Reveal Your Character's Inner Life on the PageEp. 102 - 3 Common Interiority Mistakes (and How to Fix Them)Planner Pad on AmazonSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Would you believe me if I said social media could make you a better writer? If you’re shaking your head NO, you’ll want to check out this episode. My guest, Lara Ferrari, is an Instagram marketing specialist who has helped hundreds of writers grow engaged communities of readers online (and have FUN while doing it). In this episode, she’s sharing how you can use social media to increase your creativity and motivation, get reader input and feedback, do market research, and find the accountability and support you need to become a better writer. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [02:26] What led Lara to specialize in social media marketing for authors, and how she can help you find your target audience of readers online [06:09] How writers often have a negative perception of social media—it’s either a necessary evil to help them promote their books, or it’s a time suck that threatens their writing (and sometimes their mental health)[07:34] Unexpected ways social media can increase your creativity, inspiration, passion, and motivation (along with some practical examples so you can put these things into practice, too)[17:35] How to conduct actionable market research using social media—think getting reader input and feedback, sensitivity awareness, and things like that[29:51] A few different ways you can use social media to find the community, accountability, and support you need to finish your book[32:56] How to use social media intentionally to maintain your boundaries and focus on what matters most—writing your book!If you’ve ever felt unsure about social media, or if social media consistently feels like something that’s just too hard to tackle, you’re going to LOVE this episode with Lara! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Lara Ferrari’s InstagramGrab Lara’s Instagram Glow Up Guide here!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Earlier this year, I published my first book, The Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide to Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone—and I learned soooo much about book marketing. Tune into this episode to hear the ten surprising lessons I learned from my first book launch, including things like: [03:10] What I learned about asking for Amazon reviews—and how asking for favors was the most uncomfortable part of the book launch process for me[04:30] A look behind the scenes at my marketing plan, including how I balanced things like social media, emailing my list, and working with ARC Readers and influencers[07:50] What moved the needle for me and made it possible for my book to become an Amazon bestseller and the #1 New Release in the category[12:00] The hardest part of the book launch for me emotionally—and how I dealt with people who didn’t show up for me like they said they would[15:30] Why it’s important to celebrate after publishing a book (and what my celebration looked like—spoiler alert: it was very low-key but still fun!)If you want a peek behind the scenes to hear what worked, what didn’t work, what I’m glad I did, and what I’d do differently next time, you’re going to love this episode! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. #107 - List Building Essentials For AuthorsGrab a copy of my new book, The Story Grid Masterwork Guide To Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone (and then claim your bonuses) here!Leave a review for my book on AmazonSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Do you ever wish you could see a behind-the-scenes look at how other people write?  In this episode, you’ll get to hear directly from five of my Notes to Novel students as they share how they brainstormed, outlined, and wrote their books inside the Notes to Novel course. I asked each of them to share the biggest thing that helped them get to “The End” of their drafts, and that’s exactly what they’re sharing with you today. In the episode, you’ll hear things like: [01:50] How fast drafting and using placeholders for pending details helped Poornika finish a 114,000-word draft in only 88 days [04:50] How Alison learned to embrace scene structure (and what this did in terms of her ability to write a first draft)[07:40] How a small mindset shift around outlining gave Mark a framework to develop his ideas (without stifling his creativity or ability to have fun)[12:10] How Sharon’s critique group noticed an improvement in her writing after she learned how to write a well-structured scene[16:30] How Rhonda defeated her inner critic that used to tell her she was too old to write—and how she finished an 80,000-word first draftTrust me when I say that you will find these writers’ stories so inspirational! I had so much fun putting together this episode and can’t wait to share their insights with you! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Poornika Kakkanaiah’s website and InstagramAlison Ten Cate’s InstagramSharon England’s InstagramMark Mrozinski’s website and InstagramSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

As someone who’s worked with hundreds of authors, I see people making the same mistakes over and over and over again. Mistakes that are easily avoidable once you know they’re mistakes. In this episode, I’m sharing some of these mistakes. Specifically, the 10 things that will NOT make you a better writer—and oh boy is it a juicy episode! In it, you’ll hear me talk about: [01:27] Why waiting until you feel more “ready” to write is actually one of the worst things you can do (and spoiler alert: you will never feel ready!)[06:18] Why most writing groups don’t work (even if they’re full of well-meaning members)—and how to find the right writing group for you[09:16] Why writing and revising at the same time is not the best thing to do (and what you should start doing instead to make progress on your book)[20:30] The problem with popular writing methods—and why they can do more harm than good, especially if you’re brand new to writing[24:59] My thoughts on investing in your craft, including when (and how) you should invest both your time and money based on where you’re at in the process[28:26] Episode recap and final thoughtsSo, tune in and let me help you avoid making some of the most common mistakes writers make—and let’s make this the year you finish (or publish!) your book. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Notes to NovelThe Spun YarnSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“I think your story has a genre identity crisis. That’s probably why you’re not getting responses from agents.” ← That’s what I told my new friend, Jac Sahlin, about the duology she’s currently querying. Tune into this episode to hear Jac and I talk through her query letter and first five pages—and to hear my thoughts on why she hasn’t received any requests from agents. Although Jac isn’t technically a client of mine, our conversation will give you a peek behind the scenes into what it’s like working with a book coach! In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [04:59] Jac’s thoughts about what it was like to get feedback from a book coach—and how it was different than getting feedback when she was taking creative writing courses in college[08:32] My process for analyzing Jac’s query and first five pages, including where I start and what literary agents are looking for in a query package[15:41] The difference between writing women’s fiction and romance—and why this matters both when writing a draft and querying agents[31:25] Jac’s big a-ha moments about which genre she wants her story to fit into (and spoiler alert: she followed her gut and chose romance![01:03] Episode recap and final thoughtsIf you want my help with your story, the doors to my Notes to Novel group coaching program are opening soon! Click here to get on the waitlist. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Book Talk for BookTok podcastBook Talk for BookTok on InstagramSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“How many scenes are in the Diagon Alley chapter of Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone?” Believe it or not, this is one of the most frequently asked questions I get from writers when they hear I’ve written a book breaking apart this mega best seller scene by scene. And it’s a valid question! This chapter was the hardest chapter for us to analyze when putting together The Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide to Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone. But this week, Abigail K. Perry and I have an answer for you! Tune into this week’s episode to hear us take a deep dive into the structure of Chapter 5, “Diagon Alley,”—including how many scenes we see in this chapter. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [04:21] How to analyze your scenes from three different perspectives—the reader’s perspective, the character’s perspective, and the author’s perspective[11:33] A quick trick for determining if your scenes work (and how to identify which areas of your scenes need work once you’ve written them)[20:12] Why we chose to analyze this chapter as one 6,500-word-long scene versus a bunch of smaller scenes (and how the structure of this scene works)[23:12] The purpose of the smaller moments within the scene that are arguably significant (and move the scene) forward but aren’t technically “scenes”[41:14] Our final thoughts on writing a scene like Diagon AlleyIf you like this episode, you’ll LOVE my book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide. Click here to pre-order a copy and get access to a collection of bonuses in addition to a copy of the book. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Pre-order my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and get a handful of special bonuses!Watch the video interview on Story Grid’s YouTube channelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

How did Rowling deliver on the life-and-death stakes an action story requires, but in a way appropriate for middle-grade readers? How did she consistently weave together the external plot and Harry’s character arc in such a way that they’re inseparable? Tune into this episode to hear Abigail K. Perry and I talk through the plot structure of Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone using the Story Grid’s Five Commandments of Storytelling. Yep, we’ve broken down the beginning, middle, and end of the first Harry Potter book so you don’t have to. Cool, right? You’ll hear us talk about things like: 02:26] The structure of the beginning hook—aka how Rowling introduced us to Harry and immersed us in his world before sending him to Hogwarts. [10:08] How the middle build-up leads to the all-important midpoint moment. What will Harry do now that his life’s been threatened by a teacher?[22:56] How the middle breakdown brings Harry to an all-time low—and why this is critical in terms of Harry’s growth and ability to defeat Voldemort[27:57] The structure of the ending payoff—aka how Rowling continued to raise the stakes and delivered an awesome Hero At The Mercy Of The Villain scene[32:25] And so much more…If you like this episode, you’ll LOVE my book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide. Click here to pre-order a copy and get access to a collection of bonuses in addition to a copy of the book. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Pre-order my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and get a handful of special bonuses!Watch the video interview on Story Grid’s YouTube channelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Rowling is a master at weaving the external plot with Harry’s internal character arc—and using the external plot events to help Harry grow and change. In this episode, you’ll hear Abigail K. Perry and I talk through the big-picture plot structure of Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone using the Story Grid’s Five Commandments of Storytelling. We’ll also discuss how this story fits in the Action Genre Framework and how Rowling adapted that framework to suit a middle-grade audience. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Pre-order my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and get a handful of special bonuses!The Story Grid: What Good Editors Know by Shawn CoyneAction Story: The Primal Genre by Shawn CoyneSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

J.K. Rowling is the master of layering things within her scenes. She’s also fantastic at raising the stakes from scene to scene, too. But how does she do it Tune into this episode to hear Abigail K. Perry and I talk to Tim Grahl (the CEO of Story Grid) about what it was like to study Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone—what we learned from J.K. Rowling about writing scenes and so much more. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Pre-order my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and get a handful of special bonuses!Watch the video interview on Story Grid’s YouTube channelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Ever wonder how Rowling created such a fantastic, three-dimensional story world for her Harry Potter series? That’s exactly what you’ll hear in this week’s brand-new podcast episode! Join me, Abigail K. Perry, and Tim Grahl, as we discuss the world-building in Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone—and what we learned from our analysis of this mega best seller. You’ll hear us talk about things like: [02:38] How Rowling built a fantastic story world ripe for life and death conflicts (but in a way that’s age-appropriate for middle-grade readers)[04:39] How Rowling focused on fleshing out the world-building details that mattered for book one—and introduced them to readers right alongside Harry[08:18] How to think about your own world-building (spoiler alert: you don’t need to have everything figured out or perfectly mapped in your early drafts!)[12:43] How Rowling made every detail of her world count—and how she used those details to hide important plot clues and encourage character development[16:27] And so much more… If you like this episode, you’ll LOVE my book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide. Click here to pre-order a copy and get access to a collection of bonuses in addition to a copy of the book. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Pre-order my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and get a handful of special bonuses!Watch the video interview on Story Grid’s YouTube channelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Plot catalysts make it difficult for a character to achieve their goals. If you’re writing an Action story, there are three main plot catalysts you’ll want to include in your book—a speech in praise of the villain, a deadline or ticking clock, and one or more set-piece action sequences. Tune into this episode to hear a sneak peek from my new book, The Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide to Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone, and hear how Rowling used plot catalysts to keep readers engaged. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Pre-order a copy of my book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and get a handful of special bonuses!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Ever wonder how Rowling created such a wonderful cast of quirky and relatable characters in the Harry Potter series?  If so, tune into this episode to hear Abigail K. Perry, Tim Grahl, and me talk about the characters in Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone.  You’ll hear us talk about things like: [02:32] How to think about the number of characters you include in your story (and what we can learn from the characters Rowling highlighted in book one)[09:17] How to write a dynamic cast of characters that can help your protagonist grow and change (and, in Harry’s case, aid or harm his ability to survive)[09:49] Why Rowling layered the forces of antagonism Harry faces in this first book (and why this was necessary based on his age and skill level)[17:07] How point of view choice affects our interpretation of the events in the story—and influences whether we classify certain characters as “good” or “evil”[20:26] And so much more…If you like this episode, you’ll LOVE my book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide. Click here to pre-order a copy and get access to a collection of bonuses in addition to a copy of the book. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: re-order my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and get a handful of special bonuses!Watch the video interview on Story Grid’s YouTube channelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

What made Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone a worldwide bestseller? Why does this story still resonate with readers almost thirty years later? And why did Abigail and I agree to spend so much time dissecting every single scene and page to find out how and why it works?! Tune into this episode to hear Abigail K. Perry and I talk to Tim Grahl (the CEO of Story Grid) about what it was like to study Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone—why we chose this book, what we learned from our analysis, and so much more. ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Pre-order my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and get a handful of special bonuses!Watch the video interview on Story Grid’s YouTube channelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Ever wish you could understand exactly what makes your favorite stories so lovable? Me too! So much so that I deconstructed every single scene in the first Harry Potter book to see how and why it worked.  And today, I’m super excited to share with you that my brand-new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, is officially available for pre-order right now! Tune into this episode to hear me talk about things like: [03:25] What’s inside the book and how it’s structured (spoiler: it’s a writer’s companion guide to the first Harry Potter book that examines every single scene) [06:00] Who this book is for (another spoiler: it’s for anyone who wants to learn how to write like Rowling, whether you’re writing fantasy or not) [07:15] All the JUICY details about the pre-order bonuses I’m giving away—bonuses so good they’re worth paying for (but yours free with purchase) [10:00] Behind-the-scenes insight into why pre-orders are so important (hint: I want to deconstruct the whole Harry Potter series and need your help!)Click here to pre-order your copy of Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and you’ll also get access to a collection of bonuses in addition to a copy of the book as soon as it’s available on July 31st, 2024. Thank you so much for being on this journey with me! Your support means the world to me, and I can’t thank you enough. I’m sooo excited to hear your thoughts on this book, so please tag me on Instagram (@savannah.gilbo) when you get your copy!  ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Pre-order my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide, and get a handful of special bonuses!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Antagonists can make or break a story—both for the writer and the reader.  Writers who don’t spend time developing their antagonists tend to write drafts that fall apart in the middle. Anyone who reads a story with a weak or unconvincing protagonist is unlikely to finish it.  So, how do we go about making our antagonists just as compelling as our protagonists? How do we write an antagonist with impact? In this episode, I’m sharing five questions that will help you create a compelling, genre-appropriate antagonist who will provide the central conflict in your novel.  In the episode, you’ll learn things like: [02:25] What does it mean to write “an antagonist?” Plus, my thoughts on the common misconception that antagonists are always “bad guys”[04:11] Tips for fleshing out your antagonist’s goal, motivation, and plans—aka THE KEY to writing a solid antagonist (and avoiding a middle that sags)[13:47] An easy way to determine what’s at stake for your antagonist should they succeed or fail in accomplishing their goal (hint: it’s related to your genre!)[19:26] How to determine the thematic significance of your antagonist (and how identifying this will help you write a more cohesive and impactful story)[23:09] Episode recap and final thoughtsIf you’ve ever had trouble fleshing out your story’s antagonist, or if you’ve ever written a draft that falls apart in the middle, this is the episode for you! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 131 - 5 Steps To Start Planning Your Book SeriesEp. 145 - How To Develop Your Character's BackstoryPre-order my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis GuideSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Never wonder if readers will love your story again.” This is exactly what Theodora Taylor teaches you how to do in her book 7 FIGURE FICTION: How to Use Universal Fantasy to SELL Your Books to ANYONE. Despite writing fiction in a niche genre (interracial romance), Theodora Taylor has grown a fanbase of rabid readers and fans through the power of something she calls Universal Fantasy—aka “the ingredients you need to write DELICIOUS stories!” In this episode, Theodora Taylor shares how she discovered Universal Fantasy, and how she uses it to codify what works (or doesn’t work) in her own writing. She gives examples from popular books and movies, and even shares how you can use Universal Fantasy in your back cover copy, query letters, and more. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [04:52] How Theodora discovered Universal Fantasy in a Facebook ads class—and how this immediately resulted in an increase in book sales[09:05] How Universal Fantasy can be the missing link between your book and the right kind of readers who will love it just as much as you do[13:33] An example of a Universal Fantasy from Disney’s Beauty and the Beast (and also how this relates to the fixer-upper trope)[16:33] What Cinderella, Harry Potter, and Mark Watney have in common (spoiler alert: they’re all the same Universal Fantasy: the Suffering Cinderella!)[20:05] How Universal Fantasy can help you “butter up” your settings, characters, and dialogue—and write the most DELICIOUS stories possible[35:12] How Universal Fantasy can help you write your back cover copy, find accurate comp titles, and write query letters that agents will loveIf you’ve ever wondered how some books feel like they’re made with magic (or some kind of special secret sauce), you’re going to love this episode with Theodora Taylor! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Theodora Taylor’s Website7 FIGURE FICTION: How to Use Universal Fantasy to SELL Your Books to ANYONE by Theodora TaylorTheodora Taylor’s FictionSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Want a peek behind the scenes into my work week? 👀 In this episode, I’m taking you behind the scenes and sharing what I do as a developmental editor and book coach. I’ll talk through the projects I’m working on, what I’m excited (or not excited) about, what’s coming up in the next few weeks, what I learn from the writers I work with, and basically anything else that happens during the week! Tune into the episode to hear me talk about things like: [05:07] A behind-the-scenes look at the making of this podcast—how (and why) I batch script and record multiple episodes at a time[09::07] What it was like to work through the copy edits on my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis Guide[13:15] How I manage my energy and mental health when I have a week full of live videos that require lots of extroverting (and why this is so important)[18:10] A preview of some of the marketing plans for my upcoming book release in July (including how I’m thinking about my ARC Team & Street Team)[27:55] Some client wins, including a book cover reveal, a revise and resubmit (R&R) request, and how one writer is stuck choosing between two agentsThanks for coming on this journey with me, and I hope you enjoy this peek behind the scenes! See you next week! Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to get on the waitlist for my new book, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone: A Story Grid Masterwork Analysis GuideAuthor Accelerator’s Book Coach Certification ProgramJust Food For DogsSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

If you’ve ever felt frustrated with your progress (or lack of progress), it’s probably time to take a step back from your writing and consider your mindset. To help you do just that, I’m sharing a conversation in today’s podcast episode with April Dávila, an award-winning author, speaker, and writing coach who specializes in teaching writers to integrate mediation into their writing practice. Tune into this episode to hear us talk about how integrating mindfulness in her writing practice helped April push past writer’s block, write fewer drafts, craft more compelling characters, and so much more. In the episode, you’ll hear us talk about things like: [03:18] How April’s mindfulness practice helped her go from struggling to write her novel to getting an agent, selling her book, and winning awards[07:20] What you can do in just 5-10 minutes per day to develop your own mindfulness practice—and how this can help you be a more focused writer[10:20] How to identify the root cause of your writer’s block (and why this is so important in terms of your ability to banish writer’s block for good)[12:54] Why understanding your emotions (and sitting with them even if they’re uncomfortable) is the key to writing characters that are rich and engaging[20:19] April’s favorite tip for editing your own work more effectively (and how it’s not just about “taking time and space away from your draft”)[29:35] Why it’s important to be kind and compassionate to yourself so that you don’t get burned out or end up feeling so discouraged that you quit writingThis is a super fun episode with my guest, April Dávila, and I can’t wait for you to hear her top 6 ways mindfulness can make you a happier and more productive writer. Click here to listen! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: April Dávila on InstagramApril Dávila WebsiteEp. 88 - Perfectionism vs. Procrastination: What's REALLY Going On?Ep. 123 - How To Overcome The 5 Types Of Imposter SyndromeSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Crafting compelling backstories for your fictional characters is critical to developing a cohesive story, but it’s sometimes easier said than done. There are endless options when it comes to which details you can include in your character’s backstory, and what you do include will influence everything that happens in your story—from the plot events to your character’s motivations to your own ability to manage the thematic subtext of your story on a scene-by-scene-basis. In this episode, I’m going to walk you through how to develop your character’s backstory in three steps, including things like: [04:12] How to uncover your character’s wounding event that gives rise to a specific fear (or inner obstacle) that haunts them in the present-day[06:57] A framework to help you crystalize your character’s inner obstacle—and why doing this work helps you establish where their character arc starts[09:31] How your character’s backstory can help inform your plot (and help you create meaningful conflict to help them grow and change)[12:55] An exploration of Simon Basset’s backstory and character arc (from the first Bridgerton book, The Duke & I)[17:42] Episode recap and final thoughtsDeveloping your character’s backstory before you start writing can help you develop your theme, craft your plot, build your story world, and so much more. That being said, there’s no “right” or “wrong” time to flesh out your character’s backstory. Do whatever works best for you and your process! Click here to listen! ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 14 - How to Handle Character Backstory in Your NovelThe Emotional Wound Thesaurus: A Writer's Guide to Psychological Trauma by Angela Ackerman and Becca PuglisiSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Have you ever heard someone say that the only difference between a published author and an unpublished author is that the published author never gave up? I wholeheartedly believe this, and my guest today proves it’s true. Savannah Carlisle writes heartwarming romance novels that transport readers to fun and quirky small towns where friends feel like family. And her debut novel, The Library of Second Chances, is officially available for purchase as of May 2024.  Tune into this episode to hear us talk about her path to publication—from writing the first draft of this story to breaking up with her agent to working with a developmental editor and #kisspitch mentor to ultimately finding a home at her dream publisher. In the episode, we talk about things like: [09:47] How Savannah pulled inspiration from her real-life, You’ve Got Mail, and her dream publisher’s wishlist to write The Library of Second Chances  [11:37] Why Savannah broke up with her agent (and how, in hindsight, this was one of the best decisions Savannah’s made in terms of her writing)  [14:10] The biggest takeaway Savannah had from working with a developmental editor (me!)—and how this still informs her writing today  [16:10] What it was like to work with Jessica Lepe, a #kisspitch mentor and author, who just finished querying a similar story based on You’ve Got Mail  [22:35] How Savannah found her dream publisher as an un-agented author at Harpeth Road (and why she went this route versus self-publishing)  [25:50] What it was like to find her current agent—and why she believes having an agent is important (even though she’s a lawyer herself) ⭐ Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! 🔗 Links mentioned in this episode: Savannah Carlisle’s WebsiteSavannah Carlisle on InstagramThe Library of Second Chances by Savannah CarlisleJessica Lepe’s WebsiteThe Manuscript AcademyEp. 40 - How to Write a Well-Structured SceneSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Human beings want to hear the stories of other human beings. And that's exactly what podcasts do.” - Michelle Glogovac You have a finished book, now what? Learn how to pitch yourself to podcasts (and create your own podcast book tour!) in this episode.  Here’s a preview of what’s included: [04:47] What is a podcast book tour? And what are the benefits of doing one? [12:20] How to pitch yourself, even if you don’t have a finished book. [31:32] How to repurpose content from your interviews so you get the biggest ROI from your effort. [36:58] Michelle encourages authors of all experience levels to share their own unique story—and to find value in sharing that story, even if you don't have a finished book just yet. Links mentioned in this episode: Michelle's WebsiteBook: How to Get on PodcastsFollow Michelle on InstagramEpisode #85: Student Spotlight: How She Overcame Her Fear of the Blank Page (and Indie Published Her Novel) with Jennifer LauerRead this episode's blog post here! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“I recommend working on your query letter as soon as you feel good enough about the overall shape of your story.” - Savannah Gilbo Agents and editors must sort through hundreds of query letters to find an outstanding story. So, how do you write a query letter that catches their attention and makes them want to read more? Tune into this episode to learn how to write a query letter that works! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:31] What are query letters, and why are they important? [03:46] How to write a query letter. [14:49] How to troubleshoot your query letter if it’s too long or not working. [18:02] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know your favorite episodes, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links Mentioned In This Episode: Episode #58: 10 Querying Mistakes (and How to Avoid Them)QuerySharkQueryTrackerRead this episode's blog post here!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“The object itself didn't cause the conflict. The person who made the choice with the object caused the conflict.” - Randy Ellefson In today’s episode, we’re going to cover something really fun—how to create believable monsters. And I have a special guest joining me today—someone that knows way more about creating monsters than I do. His name is Randy Ellefson, and he is the author of The Art of World Building.  Here’s a preview of what’s included: [03:48] Randy gives us his definition of a monster, what physical or physiological deformities they may have, and whether they are sentient beings. [16:05] Randy breaks down the three types of monsters: accidental monsters, monsters by design, and monsters by evolution. [28:42] Is it more effective to compel readers to keep reading despite knowing the outcome, or to cultivate curiosity that propels the audience to move forward? [29:15] Randy shares common monster motivations, including a popular one that may lack credibility. [50:47] The idea of exploring diverse topics and genres can expose writers to new ideas and provide fresh perspectives, even for writers not typically inclined towards fantasy, sci-fi, or historical fiction. Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to register for the free Sci-Fi & Fantasy Author's Summit hosted by Paula Judith Johnson and Randy Ellefson! Randy's WebsiteRandy's BooksRandy's Worldbuilding ClassesEp. 111 - Student Spotlight: From Messy First Draft to Publishing His Debut Novel With Edward J. CembalRead this episode's blog post here!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“We need to advance the plot and we need to develop the character. When you can marry the two, you have a strong scene.” - Abigail K. Perry We’re taking a deep dive into Mockingjay by Suzanne Collins to see how and why it works. Join me and Abigail K. Perry as we break down this first chapter of the third book of The Hunger Games trilogy to see how it hooks our interest and pulls us into the story! Here's a preview of what's included:  [04:03] Chapter summary: This opening chapter sets up themes of resistance, manipulation, and personal agency against a backdrop of political turmoil and survival [07:41] Macro analysis, using Paula Munier’s 7 Key Questions: Suzanne Collins masterfully sets up the expectations by addressing the tone, themes, and stakes of "Mockingjay", ensuring readers are engaged and eager to uncover what lies ahead [26:17] Microanalysis, using Story Grid’s 5 Commandments: In the opening scene, Katniss Everdeen deals with the pressure to become the Mockingjay. Her internal conflict regarding her future role intensifies, setting the stage for subsequent events in the story. [53:13] Final thoughts: The opening scene balances macro and microelements, ensuring readers are engaged and invested from the start. Evaluating your opening chapter through this comprehensive lens is invaluable for effectively delivering the big picture and the intricate details to your audience.  Links mentioned in this episode: Check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry here! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.Episode #132 - First Chapter Analysis: The Hunger Games by Suzanne CollinsEpisode #136 - First Chapter Analysis: Catching Fire by Suzanne CollinsRead this episode's blog post here! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

Telling a story through multiple viewpoints can be a great way to create a more expansive (and objective) look at your characters, world, plot, and/or theme. But with each additional viewpoint character you add to your story, the more room there is for mistakes. In this episode, I'm sharing the 5 most common multi POV mistakes writers make and how to avoid them in your draft. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [2:10] Mistake #1: Including too many POV characters without an intentional reason for including each one. [6:10] Mistake #2: Not developing each POV character as if they were the protagonist of their own story—they lack their own goal, motivation, and conflict. [9:01] Mistake #3: Not tying the characters' storylines together via a common plot problem, a central relationship, or binding their fates together. [11:47] Mistake #4: Head hopping between different POV characters without making the switch clear to the reader. [14:56] Mistake #5: Rehashing the same scene from different POVs without offering the reader new and potent  information. Links Mentioned In This Episode: Ep. #7 - 5 Questions to Help You Write Better CharactersSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Writing is a creative project. It's not an earthquake, but the thoughts and the worries can feel similar. If I can have a positive association or feel prepared for an earthquake, surely I can do that for writing.” - Rhonda Douglas Ever found yourself staring at the blank page, trying to write but unable to find the right words? You’re not alone! Tune in to hear Rhonda Douglas share strategies for managing creative anxiety and writer’s block.  Here’s a preview of what’s included [01:29] What is creative anxiety and how does it commonly show up? [12:13] The difference between preventive vs. curative measures for dealing with creative anxiety and some examples of each that you can implement in your routine [32:21] Dividing the writing process into smaller segments, such as outlining part one of your book or focusing on just one paragraph, can help you overcome creative anxiety [38:24] I adored Rhonda's insight in this episode about proactively addressing creative anxiety before it even kicks in during your writing sessions. It's such a brilliant notion! Plus, the beauty lies in how personalized this approach can be for each writer. Whether it's a quick meditation session, setting up a cozy ambiance with a flickering candle, or simply brewing a comforting cup of tea while rounding up your favorite snacks, the options are endless! Links mentioned in this episode: Rhonda's websiteInstagramPodcast: The Resilient Writers Radio ShowRead this episode's blog post here!  Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Focus your pre-writing and drafting and revising efforts on the present moment of your story.” - Daniel David Wallace I asked five of my peers to share one of their favorite writing tips, and boy, did they deliver! Tune in to hear 5 editors and coaches talk about their favorite tip and why it’s so helpful. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:40] Tip #1: Fully embrace scene structure in your storytelling process because the narrative will flow seamlessly from beginning to end. [06:12] Tip #2: Keep your focus on the forward momentum of your story by avoiding excessive backstory or exposition that might slow down the pacing. [11:05] Tip #3: Dedicate equal attention to crafting your protagonist's internal journey as you do to advancing the external plot of your story. [14:48] Tip #4: Make the most of your story's midpoint to steer clear of the often chaotic middle of the second act. [21:52] Tip #5: If you hit a creative roadblock, assess which perspective you're currently in and try shifting to another viewpoint. [27:26] It's so easy to overlook the three distinct perspectives—be it that of the author, character, or reader—which only adds unnecessary complexity. I find immense joy in discovering what resonates with others and moves the needle for them, particularly within the writing community. After all, different techniques suit different individuals, and exploring various perspectives from writers, coaches, and editors is invaluable. Connect with Guests: Emily Golden Website Story Magic Podcast Instagram Daniel David Wallace Website Instagram Nicole Meier Website Steps to Story Podcast Instagram Abigail K. Perry Website LitMatch Podcast Instagram Links Mentioned In This Episode: Episode #40: How to Write a Well-Structured SceneEpisode #99: 5 Mindset Tips to Help You Unlock Your Writing PotentialRead this episode's blog post here!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Usually stakes start personal and they become public. That's a way of raising stakes, regardless of the genre.” - Savannah Gilbo We’re diving deep into Catching Fire by Suzanne Collins to see how and why it works. Join me and Abigail K. Perry as we break down this first chapter to see how it hooks our interest and pulls us into the story! Here's a preview of what's included:  [05:22] Chapter summary: This chapter focuses on Katniss, who is navigating life after winning the Hunger Games. There is a suggestion of impending conflict or tension on a larger scale and overall, the story explores themes of survival, resistance against oppressive systems, and the complexities of relationships under duress. [13:31] Macro analysis, using Paula Munier’s 7 Key Questions: Suzanne Collins expertly lays the groundwork for an engaging and suspenseful story. Readers are likely to feel curiosity, concern, and wonder throughout the chapter. They are curious about the unfolding events, for Katniss's well-being and relationships, and intrigued by the dystopian world. [35:16] Micro analysis, using Story Grid’s 5 Commandments: Overall, this scene marks a turning point in the protagonist’s journey, throwing her into a more dangerous and complex conflict with President Snow. It sets the stage for the central conflicts of the narrative, particularly Katniss's struggle to navigate her public image and maintain her autonomy in a society ruled by fear and control. [50:21] Final thoughts: This first chapter emphasizes the character development of Katniss and the intricate layers of stakes and decisions that drive the narrative forward. Ultimately, the discussion highlights the complexity of storytelling and the various paths that can lead to a compelling climax. Links mentioned in this episode: Check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry here! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.The Writer's Guide to Beginnings by Paula MunierStory Grid by Shawn CoyneRead this episode's blog post here!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“You, the writer, have a bigger sphere of knowledge. You know more things than the narrator necessarily knows.” - Gabriela Pereira In today’s episode, I ask Gabriela Pereira of DIY MFA for her thoughts on some of the most commonly asked questions I get about point of view and voice—and she shares some of her favorite tips and strategies for mastering POV and voice in your writing.  Here’s a preview of what’s included: [1:51] What's Gabriela’s advice for writers trying to choose the "right" point of view for their book? [05:01] 3 Tips from Gabriela for mastering POV and voice in your writing. [15:27] Using an omniscient third-person narrator may feel easier than a limited third-person but this isn’t necessarily true. We discuss how to utilize third-party omniscient without feeling dated.   [21:10] We talk about voice and Gabriela shares why she hates when people say "Find your voice". [38:20] The takeaway from this conversation is the importance of approaching the editing process systematically. For instance, beginning with the big picture before focusing on minor sentence-level adjustments, ultimately leads to a better editing process. It is valuable to also maintain consistency in voice and POV, making sure that the writer's voice shines through for clarity and coherence of the story. Links mentioned in this episode: Gabriela Pereira's WebsiteBook: DIY MFAEpisode #90 How to Choose the Best Point of View for Your StoryRead this episode's blog post here!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“It's really important to focus on the big picture story first and not worry about granular details that you can figure out later.” - Savannah Gilbo Get more done in less time, overcome procrastination, and become a master at time management with these 5 super simple productivity tips that I’ve been using daily for the last 10 years. Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:07] What is productivity and why does it matter? [04:44] How to time block your days in a way that works for YOU—plus, what this looks like for me (spoiler alert: I’m a night owl so I do my best work at night!). [10:49] Tips for prioritizing your most important tasks so you don’t get stuck in the weeds doing things that don’t move the needle in terms of finishing your book. [17:12] Why multitasking is NOT the answer to higher productivity—and a few surprising ways writers multi-task without even realizing it. [27:26] Cultivating these habits is a gradual process that requires consistent effort. If incorporating all five tips seems overwhelming, experiment with a single tip this week. As you progress, incorporate additional habits and eventually, you'll evolve into a more productive writer. Links Mentioned In This Episode: Story Starter KitSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Sometimes it's easy to take feedback to mean that your story's broken when it's not.” - Savannah Gilbo I’m taking you behind the scenes with me throughout my entire work week! You’ll see how I plan my days, what projects I work on, what I learn from the writers I work with, and so much more! Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:48] Sunday Update - This week will be a mixed bag. I’m taking a 2-day online course from Laura Belgray, who’s sharing a behind-the-scenes look at her most recent book launch. The other fun thing I’m doing is giving a presentation for ProWritingAid’s Romance Writers Week. Also, the third Crescent City book from Sarah J. Maas comes out this week, and I am so excited to read that. [06:48] Monday Update - Today, there are two big things I need to do: craft some emails for the Women In Publishing Summit, which I'm speaking at in March. The other big thing I'm working on is growing my email list and one of the ways I’m planning to do that is to be a guest on as many other writing podcasts as possible. [11:08] Tuesday Update - I’m coaching a writer who is working on two stories at once. Working on two projects at once would be hard for most people to handle. However, because this author has two novels in different stages of the process, it allows her to use different parts of her brain on different days. [16:33] Wednesday Update - The virtual class that Laura Belgray is hosting is about how she launched her book, Tough T*****s, and it was awesome. I also have a little bit of a selfish reason for wanting to see what she did because I have a book coming out later this year, and I’m hoping to learn from what Laura did so that I can have a great book launch myself. [21:03] Thursday Update - It's so easy to second-guess ourselves when it comes to mapping out or outlining our stories. There are so many decisions to be made. If you are a student of my Notes to Novel class, you can submit your loglines for me to review during any of our Q&A calls. If you don't know what a logline is, it’s essentially a 1-2 sentence summary of your story—and you can craft it before you’ve even outlined or written a single word of your book. [28:57] Friday Update - I am writing a book and it’s an analysis of the first Harry Potter book. It’s a craft book for writers that’s going to dig into the big picture and the small picture to find out why and how this story works so well. This project is something I started 5+ years ago, and it got shelved for various reasons but is now coming back into the spotlight.  Links Mentioned In This Episode Episode #54: How to Test an Idea Before Writing the First DraftEpisode #94: How to Reveal Your Character’s Inner Life on the PageEpisode #102: 3 Common Interiority Mistakes (and How to Fix Them)Waitlist: Harry Potter and the Sorcerer's Stone Analysis Guide Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“In stories that feel society dominant, is survival even worth it if you don't have freedom?” - Abigail K. Perry We’re taking a deep dive into The Hunger Games by Suzanne Collins to see how and why it works. Join me and Abigail K. Perry as we break down this first chapter to see how it hooks our interest and pulls us into the story! Read the blog post here! Here's a preview of what's included:  [04:39] Chapter summary: In the opening chapter, the author employs a tight focus on Katniss's perspective, utilizing vivid imagery and carefully chosen details to immerse the reader in the setting. [08:57] Macro analysis: We use Paula Munier’s 7 Key Questions to highlight the multifaceted nature of the narrative, incorporating elements of action, societal critique, and internal transformation. [44:16] Micro analysis: We talk through the structure of the scene using The Story Grid’s 5 Commandments. We focus on a specific scene involving Katniss and Gale since it is a well-crafted and impactful part of the narrative, showcasing the author's adept talent to convey character dynamics, conflicts, and thematic depth. [01:04 ] Final thoughts: Reflecting on this scene, it becomes apparent how it propels the narrative forward and leaves a lasting impact on the characters entwined within it. Ultimately, this initial chapter accomplishes all the essential functions expected of a compelling opening. Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry. Links mentioned in this episode: 5 Mistakes Writers Make in Their Opening PagesHow to Write a Well-Structured SceneA New Workshop For Writers: How to Hook Readers in Your First Five PagesUnderstanding Genre: How to Write Better StoriesSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“The key to making books within a series work is to grow, escalate, and complicate the conflict and stakes from book to book.” - Savannah Gilbo A good book series allows readers to immerse themselves in a world and stay there. But how do you write a series that works? To start, here are 5 steps to help you start planning your book series. Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:42] Savannah discusses the the three primary categories of book series—static, dynamic, and anthology. [03:06] The 5 steps to start planning your book series. [11:48] Analyzing a character's journey across the Hunger Games trilogy. [14:50] Unpacking Voldemort's grand plot objective versus the specific goals within each book—and the strategic implications. [21:35] A useful exercise to stimulate plot ideas for your series. [29:03] A bonus tip for enriching the worldbuilding/setting of your book series. [32:45]  As you can see, there’s a lot that goes into planning a book series. Don’t expect to have everything figured out in one or two sittings. This is something you’ll need to start and add to over time, so please know that going into this process! Links Mentioned In This Episode: Understanding Genre: How to Write Better StoriesHow to Uncover the Theme of Your StorySupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“ Flat or boring characters who are underdeveloped are never going to light up a scene, no matter how many tricks you pull.” - Savannah Gilbo If you’re writing romance, the chemistry and tension between your characters can make or break your story. Let’s explore how to create romantic chemistry between two characters in an authentic and compelling way to keep readers on the edge of their seats. Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:44] What is chemistry? [03:01] The first thing we need to do when creating chemistry between two characters is to have fully fleshed-out characters with their own goals, motivations, and inner obstacles. [03:42] Capitalize on opportunities for opposition and harmony between your characters. [07:41] The 3 key ingredients of chemistry are vulnerability, desire, and resistance [09:14] Examples from Fourth Wing by Rebecca Yarros. [17:51] Writing romantic tension between romantic and non-romantic characters [22:56]  If you want to master crafting irresistible chemistry and tension, I highly recommend studying your favorite stories. This is the best way to improve your writing. You can ask yourself questions like: What do I like about the chemistry and tension between these two characters?How did the author play on each character’s vulnerabilities within the relationship?What does each character like (or desire) about the other (physically, mentally, and emotionally)?How did the author create resistance between the characters? Why do the characters not want the relationship to move forward?What can I replicate in my own writing?And if you need help getting started with your story, check out my FREE Story Starter Kit: 5 Questions To Ask Before You Start Writing. This fillable workbook will help you build out the foundational elements of your story: genre, character, setting, plot, and theme. Grab your free copy here! Links mentioned in this episode: 5 Questions to Help You Write Better CharactersFourth Wing by Rebecca YarrosSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Work on being a better writer and work on your craft and the other stuff will follow. As long as you have a great book, marketing comes a lot easier.” - Alexa Bigwarfe In today’s brand-new episode, I’m sharing a conversation with Alexa Bigwarfe about how writers can overcome the fear of marketing their books and what you can do right now to kickstart your marketing efforts. Read the blog post here!   Here’s a preview of what’s included: [3:55] Where should new writers market their books? [05:14] Alexa advises on what to do if you're afraid of marketing your book. [09:06] How soon should writers start thinking about marketing their books? [14:16] After writing 14 non-fiction books, what is it like for Alexa to now be in the fiction world? [22:22] Alexa shares her ideas for marketing the second book of her series. [35:56] Alexa talks about the Women In Publishing Summit, a virtual conference for authors of all experience levels to learn and connect with others in the industry. Links mentioned in this episode: Women In Publishing Summit  Alexa's Instagram  Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“When a story doesn't include these key scenes and conventions of its genre, it's just not going to work.” - Savannah Gilbo Want a framework for your entire story? Learn what readers expect from a story like yours, and then use these obligatory scenes and conventions as a framework to craft a story that works. Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [03:47] What are obligatory scenes and conventions (and why are they important)? [06:58] 3 steps to finding the obligatory scenes and conventions for your story's genre. [10:31] Savannah breaks out most of the required scenes and conventions, which you can download by visiting the blog post for this episode. [13:58] How to handle the obligatory scenes and conventions of your subplots vs. the main storyline. [16:51] Final thoughts: If you don’t do the work to understand your genre, you’ll have a hard time getting your books into the hands of readers. And without readers, your story will never be experienced. That’s a terrible thought, right? To avoid this, know your genre and give your readers what they’re expecting in a new and exciting way. Give them the emotional experience they’re looking for, and you’ll earn loyal fans for life. Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 2: Understanding Genre: How to Write Better StoriesEp. 95: How to Start Writing Your Sci-Fi or Fantasy NovelSTORY by Robert MckeeThe Story Grid by Shawn CoyneSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“It might seem strange to start a story with an ending, but all endings are also beginnings. We just don't know it at the time.” - Abigail K. Perry In this episode, we’re talking about The Five People You Meet In Heaven by Mitch Albom to see how and why it works. Join Abigail K. Perry and me as we break down this first chapter to see how it hooks our interest and pulls us into the story. Read the blog post here! Here's a preview of what's included:   [02:40] Chapter summary: Abigail reads a summary of the first chapter and talks about how (and why) the author gives away the ending of the story upfront. [15:52] Macro analysis: We talk through the 7 Key Questions as laid out by Paula Munier in her book, The Writer's Guide to Beginnings, and how the chapter serves as a compelling opening for a character-driven story. [21:42] Abigail talks about how this story is a great example of a novel with a unique voice. [45:46] Micro analysis: We talk through the structure of the scene using the 5 Commandment scene framework as laid out by Shawn Coyne at The Story Grid, including the use of “postcard scenes”—a term they borrowed from Donald Maass. [58:30] Final thoughts: The first chapter is essential in driving the story forward so writers should ensure that they are delivering enough of the big picture to engage readers. Links mentioned in this episode: Check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry here! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.The Writer's Guide to Beginnings by Paula MunierThe Story Grid by Shawn CoyneSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Every time you write something hard, it changes you as a writer, and it makes you a better writer.” - Jessica Brody Today I'm sharing a conversation with Jessica Brody where we talk about some of the most common mistakes writers make when outlining, writing, and editing their books using the “Save the Cat” method. Read the blog post here! Here's a preview of what's included: [02:30] Jessica introduces herself and shares her experience writing fiction using the Save The Cat! plotting method. [04:00] Savannah asks Jessica about marrying the external plot of a story to the protagonist's internal arc. Savannah sees a lot of writers focus solely on the external plot events and not enough on character growth and development. Jessica shares her thoughts on how to make sure you're balancing both plot and character as you write. [11:45] Savannah asks Jessica to talk about two important multi-scene beats—the Fun and Games beat and the Bad Guys Close In beat. Jessica shares her thoughts on breaking these longer beats down into smaller, more manageable chunks. [18:00] Savannah asks Jessica about being too rigid with the Save The Cat! structure. Specifically, what happens if your beats don't line up with the percentages recommended? Jessica shares her thoughts. [21:50] Jessica talks about how she had a hard time with the All Is Lost beat and the Dark Night Of The Soul beat until she figured out a very important distinction. [30:40] Jessica talks about some things to consider in terms of your first 25-50 pages when it comes time to query agents. Links mentioned in this episode: Learn more about Jessica Brody on her website or connect with her on InstagramCheck out Jessica's craft books to go deeper into the STC! method—Save the Cat! Writes a Novel and Save the Cat! Writes a YA NovelJoin Jessica's membership, The Writing Mastery Academy, and get $20 off your annual membership using code 'FWME'Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“ The purpose of a first draft is not to come up with something that's perfect. Instead, the purpose is to explore your story and get it out of your head.” - Savannah Gilbo Transform your writing as I reveal 5 all-too-common mistakes that plague writers. Learn the savvy strategies to sidestep these blunders and discover my top-notch tips for rectifying them if you've already fallen prey. Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:20] Having gratitude for every mistake encountered and acknowledging that they served as valuable lessons. The repetition of these errors helped Savannah develop numerous solutions, contributing to her growth as a writer, editor, and book coach [05:38] The essence of a story lies in how external events impact someone striving for a challenging goal and the subsequent transformation they undergo. The narrative's power lies in the underlying story, not just the eloquence of words. Without a compelling story, the manuscript lacks substance. [11:07] Common worries and self-doubt faced by writers often revolve around questioning one's capability and self-worth. Shift to tackling these concerns by identifying the content genre of the story, offering a pathway to navigate and overcome these common anxieties in writing. [17:53] Advice to choose one or two writing methods that resonate with writers and focus on them. Whether it's scene structure or character development, selecting a preferred approach like scene and sequel or goal-motivation-conflict is encouraged. Links mentioned in this episode: How to Outline Your Novel with Save the Cat!How to Write a Well-Structured SceneNotes to NovelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“That's how much my writing's improved. But not just the writing, it's the ease. It's not a struggle when I sit down in front of the laptop to write. Everything just seems a lot easier.” - Morgan Schrock In today's episode, I reached out to some of my Notes to Novels Season 3 students and asked them to share the number one thing they learned about writing a first draft. You're going to get to hear from real writers who are in the trenches, actively working on their novels and I think it'll be very fun for you to hear how they did it plus some of their biggest takeaways. Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:26] Lindsay Sfara shares her experience where she initially faced challenges with an insufficiently detailed outline, leading to a lack of direction in her superhero fantasy novel. She highlights her struggles and the transformative impact of the Notes to Novel course. [07:56] Liya Gray has been working on a YA series since 2015, facing challenges and halting progress. She credits Savannah’s course for unlocking a new understanding of her story's structure, and realizing the difference between scenes and chapters. [12:43] Ami Blackford talks about her insights into the Notes to Novel course and its impact on her writing journey. Amy, initially felt there were missing pieces in her eighth novel's outline but she highlights four significant takeaways from the course regarding theme, content genre vs. commercial genre, structured scenes, and fast first draft and magical edits. [18:46] Tanja Fabsits shares her experience with her first novel, and a significant realization during the course was related to scene structure, but her favorite takeaway was the overall feeling of relaxing into the outlining process. [20:56] Morgan Schrock, with a background in scientific writing for journals, decided to write a fiction novel. Her most significant realization was that the middle of her story felt boring, and she identified the problem as a lack of agency for her main character. The course's outlining technique proved to be a game-changer for her. Links mentioned in this episode: Lindsay Sfara  - InstagramLiya Grey - Website, Instagram, FacebookAmi Blackford - Website, Instagram, FacebookTanja Fabsits - BookMorgan Shrock - X, InstagramFree Workshop - The Confident Writer's RoadmapSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Try learning new skills and then putting what you learn into practice right away, because, at the end of the day, you can only really learn through doing anyway.” - Savannah Gilbo Is imposter syndrome holding you back from writing a novel? Here are the EXACT action steps you can take right now to combat your feelings of self-doubt, inadequacy, and fear—and to overcome imposter syndrome for good. Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [01:28] What exactly is imposter syndrome? How can you conquer it? [06:18] How overindulgence in work can drain the creativity and enjoyment from crafting a novel and may even jeopardize your relationships. [11:06] Overly independent writers tend to reject assistance or input from others, even when it is necessary, out of the fear of being perceived as incompetent. [14:13] Writers who believe that continually reading more craft books, enrolling in additional training, or rewriting the opening chapter repeatedly, might eventually amass enough knowledge to create a flawless novel. Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 122 - Counting Down The Best Tips From FWME In 2023The Secret Thoughts of Successful Women by Dr. Valerie YoungUnlock Your Story ChallengeAll podcast episodes are available here. Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“My point is that you have to do the work to make the mistakes and learn.” - Savannah Gilbo The past year on Fiction Writing Made Easy has been a treasure trove of insights, expert advice, and creative hacks, all neatly bundled up in amazing podcast episodes and interviews. Today, we dive into a delightful countdown, revisiting the very best tips that get into the heart of fiction writing, and uncovering the gems that made 2023 an inspiration for writers.   Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:00] Savannah’s favorite ways to brainstorm subplots and then layer them into your story in an organic way. [13:34] The best technique to write quality fiction that readers will connect to. [21:30] Being willing as writers to put things out there that aren’t perfect. [35:09] As a writer, create your milestone list from one to ten. Links mentioned in this episode: Tip 10: Episode #98: How to Add Subplots to Your NovelTip 9: Episode #90: How to Choose the Best Point of View for Your StoryTip 8: Episode #109: 5 Common Scene Issues (And How to Fix Them)Tip 7: Episode #82: Show, Don't Tell: What This Advice Really MeansTip 6: Episode #79: 3 Things to Focus on if You're a Brand New WriterTip 5: Episode #88: Perfectionism vs. Procrastination: What’s REALLY Going On?Tip 4: Episode #96: 5 Worldbuilding Tips for Sci-Fi & Fantasy WritersTip 3: Episode #104:10 Tips for Writing Better DialogueTip 2: Episode #102: 3 Common Interiority Mistakes (and How to Fix Them)Tip 1: Episode #108: Why Your Capacity for Zero is Crucial as a WriterAll podcast episodes are available here. Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“The more work you do up front and the more you get your mindset right, the more likely your chances of success are.” - Savannah Gilbo In this episode, I'm giving you a glimpse behind the scenes and sharing some of the key takeaways I learned from coaching writers this year. I hope that you'll be able to reap some of the benefits of these lessons so that you can move forward with your writing in the most efficient way possible.  Read the blog post here! Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:50] It's easier to make progress when surrounded by a community of like-minded writers. [05:48] Before your query letter and submission materials, you should have a finished draft of your synopsis and get outside feedback from a developmental editor or beta readers. [09:53] Why do more writers seem to be choosing self-publishing over traditional publishing? [15:04] Savannah’s recommendation of starting a story at a different place and how perfectionism has also impacted almost every writer I worked with this year. Links mentioned in this episode: Episode #66: The Pros and Cons of Traditional PublishingFREE Story Starter KitJane Freedman's Hot Sheet NewsletterNotes to Novel Unlock Your Story Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“I think that's really important at the end of every time that you write a scene. Ask yourself, how can I raise the stakes even more?” - Abigail K. Perry Join us today as we embark on a thrilling literary journey through the fantastical world of Fourth Wing by Rebecca Yaros. In this episode, I'm joined by Abigail K. Perry and I encourage you to read this mesmerizing tale, peel it apart with us, and participate in our analysis of it. Read the blog post here! Here's a preview of what's included:   [05:42] Chapter summary: The first chapter of Fourth Wing leaves readers hanging on the edge, both emotionally and figuratively, setting the stage for a tale brimming with intrigue, familial conflict, and the high stakes of a world defined by war and loyalty. [11:53] Macro analysis: This novel aims to captivate readers with its combination of action, fantasy, and romance within the new adult framework. The novel features a skillful balance between internal character development and external conflicts, seeking approval from parents, creating a rich narrative that explores both the character's inner struggles and the broader context of a war-torn world filled with secrets and conspiracies. [32:54] Micro analysis: Discussing differing views on the crisis and turning point, a debate about whether to consider the author’s writing as one scene or split it into multiple scenes, and understanding the protagonist’s goal and actions and decisions within it. Also, there is the effectiveness of putting a crisis on the page, illustrating the character's internal struggle and the stakes involved. [53:08] Final thoughts: The balance between setup and resolution in scenes, emphasizing the need for purposeful content that propels the plot forward, and the careful construction of scenes, focusing on character development, plot progression, and the effective integration of stakes and conflicts. Links mentioned in this episode: "Fourth Wing" by Rebecca Yarros“The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings: How to Craft Story Openings That Sell” by Paula MunierSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“It's the inciting incident, the turning point, the crisis moment, the climax, and the resolution, and each scene really needs to have that to move the story forward.” - Fern Bernstein In today's episode, I’m sitting down for a conversation with Fern Bernstein to talk about her debut novel, Staunch: The Edie's of Grey Gardens.  Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:44] Savannah reads the back cover of Staunch: The Edie's of Grey Gardens to get context for today’s discussion. [12:14] The history and unanswered questions around the Edie’s, how they inspired Fern’s book, and the character work and story structure Fern worked through with Savannah about these wonderful women of Grey Gardens, East Hampton, New York. [21:11] Going through the outline, having consecutive drafts, and the balancing act of taking the reader through a particular emotional journey through two different timelines. [32:37] How beta readers impacted Fern’s opinion of her writing and being open to feedback and constructive criticism as a writer. Links mentioned in this episode: Fern Bernstein's WebsiteFern Bernstein's Amazon PageFern Bernstein on InstagramFern Bernstein on FacebookGrey Gardens Podcast With Fern BernsteinMah Jongg Mondays PodcastFern Bernstein on XGrey Gardens (movie)The Spun YarnSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Every story has one main question that it raises in the beginning and answers by the end.” - Savannah Gilbo In this latest podcast episode, we'll explore a fundamental element of storytelling: the Major Dramatic Question (MDQ). From the outset of your story, readers should be gripped by this central question. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:31] Savannah talks about why the major dramatic question (MDQ) of a story is a helpful question for writers and how you can find the MDQ of your story. [04:27] What's going to help you write a story that's full of narrative drive (the thing that keeps readers turning the pages)? [08:12] Once you know your story's Major Dramatic Question (MDQ), what do you do with it? [09:44] How your story’s MDQ can help during the publishing process and can pique a potential reader's interest. Links mentioned in this episode: Episode #2: How to Choose the Best Genre for Your StoryThe Fourth Wing by Rebecca YarrosNotes to Novel CourseUgly Love by Colleen HooverYellow Face by R. F. Kuang Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“As I kid I was like, I would love to get paid to read.” - Julie Taylor In today’s episode, I’m sitting down to chat with Julie Taylor, Chief Operating Officer at The Spun Yarn - a company that offers paid beta reading and sensitivity reading services to authors. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [06:15] How does The Spun Yarn create a perfect matching system between its authors and its beta readers? [15:37] When would an author need this type of service? How is it different than working with an editor? [31:14] The beta-readers-questioning-method and thinking process. [47:28] Making changes throughout the years thanks to feedback given by both authors and beta readers. Links mentioned in this episode: The Spun Yarn websiteThe Spun Yarn on FacebookThe Spun Yarn on LinkedInThe Spun Yarn on X Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“In every story, you want to have that internal change because, without internal change, there is no character change.” - Savannah Gilbo In today’s episode, both Abigail K. Perry and I talk about the intriguing world of "Anxious People" by Frederick Backman. Buckle up, because this first chapter exploration is different from any other you've encountered before. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [05:08] Chapter summary: an unnamed narrator describes a plot involving idiots, bad decisions, and a hostage drama. The narrator outlines key events and this summary stands out because it reveals what appears to be the story's conclusion, offering a unique approach. [16:14] Macro analysis: the challenge of categorizing this book within a specific content genre due to its unique blend of elements and how labeling it solely as a crime story might not align with the reader's expectations.  [41:30] Micro analysis: highlighting the importance of identifying character motivations and understanding the events that propel the story forward, even in the absence of a traditional scene.  [47:37] Final thoughts: the concept of turning points within the narrative structure and dissecting the crucial moments that force characters into dilemmas.  Links mentioned in this episode: "Anxious People" by Frederick Backman“Anxious People” on NetflixEpisode #113” First Chapter Analysis: The Magicians by Lev GrossmanHamilton The MusicalHarry Potter Book SeriesLit Match: Hosted by Abigail K. Perry Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“I tried to ignore it, but when inspiration strikes, sometimes the inspiration keeps striking, and it just didn't want to go.” - Anne Mortensen In today’s episode, I’m sitting down with Anne Mortensen to talk through what it was like to write, edit, and publish not one, but two of her books. You'll also get an exclusive look at her experience working alongside a developmental editor and book coach (that's me!) to bring her stories to life. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [02:05] Anne introduces herself, talks about her background, and lets us know what kind of books she writes. [04:44] A quick highlight reel of Anne’s books and writing journey. [08:34] Where the inspiration for her novel, The Arcadian Match came from. [11:03] Working on getting to the essence of the book's characters. [14:40] How much of the external plot changed from the first draft to after Anne met her character? [18:21] While pressure testing the outline, does Anne remember having any moments where something clicked? [22:09] What was it like for Anne to go back to her first book after working on her second book and hitting a roadblock? [27:30] Is the coaching experience the best? If so, why? [29:54] What was Anne’s relationship with feedback before coaching? [32:20] What would Anne say to other writers who are afraid of the feedback of others? [35:46] How long did it take to get a first draft done for “Arcadian Match”? [37:21] Is Anne working on her third book now? [40:24] How to deal with challenges and never give up? [41:38] What are the things Anne sees that make the writers she works with successful and other writers not? [43:21] Parting words of wisdom from Anne. If you enjoyed this episode of the Fiction Writing Made Easy Podcast, please rate, review, and follow this show! Links mentioned in this episode: Head over to savannahgilbo.com for a full transcriptAnne Mortensen's websiteThe Arcadian Match (out June 2023)The Truth Effect (out October 2021)Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“Dialogue is a form of action. We can utilize what's happening around the dialogue to assist what's being said.” - Savannah Gilbo Today, I'm thrilled to talk about the intricate art of dialogue with you once more. We're going to explore three common pitfalls that often lurk in dialogue and learning how to navigate these challenges can truly elevate your storytelling. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [02:34] Savannah explains the meaning of attributions and what to do when you doubt if something being said is clear to the reader. [06:55] Reading a snippet from “Mockingjay” by Suzanne Collins and why it is a great example of keeping attributions simple. [11:27] Why asking rhetorical questions undermines the emotional potential of your scenes.  [14:15] The value of not including too much backstory or too much information in your dialogue. Links mentioned in this episode: Episode #104: 10 Tips For Writing Better DialogueThe Hunger Games Series (Book 3): Mockingjay by Suzanne CollinsThe Unmaking of June Farrow by Adrienne YoungDivine Rivals by Rebecca Ross Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

“I feel that emotional connection, the emotional struggles here are going to be a big gameplay in how the story is executed.” - Abigail K. Perry Magic has always fascinated us, hasn't it? The mere thought of a world where the impossible becomes possible, where spells are cast, and extraordinary adventures unfold, has captivated readers for generations. In the realm of adult fantasy novels, one name stands out – Lev Grossman and his masterpiece, "The Magicians." Today, both Abigail K. Perry, host of the LitMatch podcast, and I embark on a magical yet realistic journey as we unravel the intricacies of the first chapter. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [06:17] Abigail gives a summary of The Magicians by Lev Grossman [21:51] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [58:40] A micro analysis of the scene within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [01:20] Final thoughts on analyzing chapters and scenes Links mentioned in this episode: The Magicians by Lev GrossmanLitMatch podcastSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

You need to get readers asking questions to hook them into your story, but you don’t want them asking the wrong questions or being so confused that they stop reading altogether. In this episode, I share 5 questions your readers should never have to ask—here's a preview of what's included: [01:58] Who is this person? [03:35] Where is the scene taking place? [04:50] Who else is in the scene? [06:15] What's the point of this? [07:55] Why should I care? [10:25] Final thoughts and episode recap Links Mentioned in the Episode: Ep. 10 - How to Create Memorable Characters Using HooksSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sitting down with Edward J. Cembal to talk through what it was like to write, edit, and publish his debut novel, The Monsters In Our Shadows. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [04:00] A quick introduction to Edward J. Cembal (including a timeline of his writing, editing, and publishing journey) as well as a summary of his debut dystopian novel, The Monsters In Our Shadows [09:00] Edward describes what it’s like working with a book coach, an editor, and beta readers—including what it’s like receiving feedback from different sources [22:00] What it’s like to dig deep and put your “blood on the page” in terms of writing a protagonist who shares some of your own inner struggles—and how Edward feels now that he’s gone through that process [28:00] Edward shares how his novel accidentally ended up in Hollywood—and how this totally uprooted his plans to self-publish (but why he self-published anyway) Links mentioned in this episode: Edward J. Cembal’s websiteEdward J. Cembal on InstagramThe Monsters In Our Shadows (out October 2023)Richard LJoenes (cover designer)Andrew Lowe (editor)Rachel Cone-Gorham (RxD Agency)Wango Films (Tim Doiron, James van der Woerd, April Mullen)Want to learn more about my Notes to Novel course? Click here to read all about it and join the waitlist. Doors are opening again soon!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing my thoughts on writing courses—including 5 things that make a fiction writing course worth your time and money. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [02:15] A good writing course should provide you with more than just “tactics and templates.” It should move you beyond just learning and get you into action. [04:45] A good writing course should provide you with a community of like-minded writers who share similar goals and access to a mentor who can support you. [08:05] A good writing course should feel like a “HECK YES!” And if it doesn't, then it's probably a heck no—and that's okay! Trust your gut on this decision. [09:15] My two cents re: the question, "Can you learn to write a book from all the free resources online and/or in craft books?" (Spoiler alert: YES, you can!) Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Interested in joining the Notes to Novel course next time doors open for enrollment? Click here to add your name to the waitlist!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing 5 of the most common “scene level” issues to look for when editing your draft.  Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [02:44] Issue #1: The scene isn’t properly structured and it feels flat. [03:59] Issue #2: The POV character doesn’t have enough agency. [05:57] Issue #3: There’s too much extra stuff crowding the scene. [07:50] Issue #4: There’s not enough interiority on the page. [09:35] Issue #5: The POV is inconsistent (aka there's head hopping) [11:22] Final thoughts and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: The 5-Day Unlock Your Story: A LIVE challenge designed to help you get your ideas out of your head and onto the page.Ep. 40 - How to Write a Well-Structured SceneEp. 43 - 10 Tips For Writing Better ScenesEp. 63 - Don’t Start A Scene Without These 3 ThingsEp. 74 - When Should You Write in Scene vs. Summary?Ep. 94 - How to Reveal Your Character’s Inner Life on the PageSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing one of my favorite mindset tips—and it all has to do with your ability (and willingness) to start from scratch. I call it strengthening your capacity for zero. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:25] Your capacity for zero describes how willing you are to start over if something you’re outlining or writing doesn’t work. [04:45] What happened when I told one of the writers I work with that she had to start over after writing a 40,000-word first draft [11:00] How to strengthen your capacity for zero (including some question prompts to get you started thinking about your current capacity for zero) [12:25] Final thoughts and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 71 - Student Spotlight: How She Wrote a Novel in 6 Months (and Landed an Agent 10 Months Later) with Stefanie MedrekFREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here → Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing 3 steps to help you get started with list building. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [1:45] Having an email list is one of the best ways to build relationships with your readers over time. It’s what helps keep you top of mind the next time readers are looking for a new book to read, or a book to share with their friends and family. [3:15] Step 1: Define your target audience of readers. These are the people who will buy your book, leave you positive reviews, and recommend it to all their friends. It’s who all your marketing efforts need to speak to! [5:35] Step 2: Start generating leads for your list by offering a freebie (or lead magnet) in exchange for email addresses. You could offer things like sample chapters, book club questions, free ebooks, character interviews, and more. [9:30] Step 3: Develop your content strategy so that you can stay in communication with your subscribers and build that “know, like, and trust” factor before you write and sell your next book. Don’t overcomplicate this step! [12:25] Final thoughts and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 106 - 5 Steps to Building Your Author Platform FREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here → Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing 5 steps to building an author platform. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [00:59] Your author platform is the foundation for all your future book marketing efforts. You can start building it no matter where you’re at in the writing process! [02:07] Step 1: Define your target audience of readers [03:15] Step 2: Design your unique author brand [06:10] Step 3: Create your author website [07:49] Step 4: Setup your email list [09:51] Step 5: Develop your communication strategy [15:42] Final thoughts and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 4 - How to Identify Your Story’s Ideal ReaderFREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here → Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, Abigail K. Perry and I take a deep dive into the first chapter of Lessons in Chemistry by Bonnie Garmus. Here’s a preview of what we talk about: [03:17] A very quick summary of the first two chapters [06:30] Our analysis of the scene/s within the first two chapters using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [25:11] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!   Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Want to join our book club? Click here to learn more!Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.FREE TRAINING: 5 Secrets to Help You Start and Finish Your Novel. Register here for instant access to the free video training! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing my top 10 tips for writing stronger, more impactful dialogue in your novel. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [02:00] Tip #1: Make sure your dialogue serves a purpose in the overarching story. [03:00] Tip #2: Think of your dialogue as action vs. exposition (or active vs. passive). [06:09] Tip #3: Get clear on each character’s goal and motivation within a scene. [07:43] Tip #4: Make sure your dialogue is ripe with conflict and tension. [10:02] Tip #5: Check that your dialogue sounds right for your genre and tone. [11:15] Tip #6: Ensure each character has a unique and rich vocabulary. [13:13] Tip #7: Curate your dialogue to show readers only what they need to see. [14:30] Tip #8: Keep your dialogue short and to the point. [16:16] Tip #9: Aim to have your dialogue do more than one thing—and include subtext. [18:19] Tip #10: Use dialogue to help you control your story’s pacing. [20:17] Final thoughts and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 92 - The 5 Functions of Dialogue in Your StoryFREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here → Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m covering the conventions of the morality genre using the movie A Man Called Otto as an example. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [05:09] The protagonist starts the story at their worst (with a "wrong" moral compass) [06:40] The antagonist pressures the protagonist to face their bad behavior/wrongdoing [07:54] The protagonist is haunted by their past mistakes or selfish behavior [09:09] A character who represents the consequences of the protagonist’s wrongdoing [10:20] At least one mentor figure who helps the protagonist see right from wrong [11:13] External conflict that pits the protagonist's goals against the needs of others [12:53] A foil character who positively or negatively demonstrates different behavior [14:24] The protagonist gets help from unexpected sources [15:23] The setting must offer the protagonist opportunities to be selfish or altruistic [16:49] The end of the story is often bittersweet [18:04] Final thoughts and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 72 - The 6 Key Scenes Every Morality Story NeedsEpisode Freebie: Morality Genre Cheat SheetFREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here → Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing the 3 most common interiority mistakes I see writers make, as well as how to fix them. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [03:20] Mistake 1: The “too passive” protagonist. Your protagonist should always crave agency, even if they can't physically take action.  [06:17] Mistake 2: The protagonist whose always present. Real people think about the past and future while making decisions. Your characters should too! [09:12] Mistake 3: The protagonist knows what the author knows. It's important to separate the character's knowledge from the author's so the reader can properly immerse themselves in the story. [13:00] Final thoughts and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 7 - 5 Questions to Help You Write Better CharactersEp. 82 - Show, Don't Tell: What This Advice Really MeansEp. 94 - How to Reveal Your Character’s Inner Life on the PageFREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here → Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, Abigail K. Perry and I take a deep dive into the first chapter of Remarkably Bright Creatures by Shelby Van Pelt. Here’s a preview of what we talk about: [05:38] A very quick summary of the first chapter [13:37] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [43:08] A micro analysis of the scene within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [52:50] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Want to join our book club? Click here to learn more!Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.FREE TRAINING: 5 Secrets to Help You Start and Finish Your Novel. Register here for instant access to the free video training! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m taking you behind the scenes with me throughout my entire week, and I’m going to share what I’m working on, what big projects I’m focused on right now, and basically, anything that happens during the week.  I'm always curious as to how people set up their day and what they're working on, and how they choose what they're going to actually work on that week. So, I thought you might be curious to know what I do all day as an editor and book coach—what I focus on and how I navigate through many, many, many action items. So, that’s what this episode is all about. I hope you enjoy this peek behind the scenes! Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to register for my FREE training all about the 5 Secrets to Help You Start and Finish Your Novel!Ep. 85 - Student Spotlight: How She Overcame Her Fear of the Blank Page (and Indie Published Her Novel) with Jennifer LauerEp. 91 - Student Spotlight: How She Went From First Draft to Landing Her Dream Agent with Jamie VaronWant to join our book club? Click here to learn more!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing a round-up of mindset tips from some of my peers! Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [02:00] Rachel May of Golden May Editing shares a mindset tip about taking the pressure off of your writing practice by letting it be easy. You can learn more about Rachel, Golden May Editing, and her Story Magic podcast here! [04:43] Georgina Green shares a mindset tip about using better language to talk to yourself about writing. She suggests operating from a growth mindset vs. a fixed one. You can learn more about George and her Calliope Writer’s Group here! [08:55] Kenny MacKay shares a mindset tip about not letting your self-doubt and limiting beliefs get the best of you. He suggests facing them head-on so that you can start making progress. Learn more about Kenny and his Author Your Dream podcast here! [12:00] Dani Abernathy shares a mindset tip that will help you infuse more of YOU in your writing so that you can make a bigger impact. Learn more about Dani here! [16:10] Brooke Adams Law shares six ways to develop your persistence muscle so that you can stick with it and finish your book. Learn more about Brooke here! [20:40] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Interested in becoming a book coach? Click here to learn more about Author Accelerator's Book Coach Certification program and to claim your $300 worth of bonuses before the offer expires on July 15th!FREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here →Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing how to add subplots to your novel. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [1:50] Subplots are secondary storylines that receive less emphasis (and page time) than the main plot. The main purpose of any subplot in a novel is to enhance the main theme and conflict of the story. [2:45] Subplots have three primary relationships to your main plot. They can contradict or complement your theme and/or complicate the central conflict of your story. [06:05] Subplots typically come into play at the start of the second act (or at the start of the middle section of your story). However, subplots can also start and develop right alongside your primary plotline in act one (or in the begging section of your story). [09:00] Examples from Pride and Prejudice and Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone [11:20] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Interested in becoming a book coach? Click here to learn more about Author Accelerator's Book Coach Certification program and to claim your $300 worth of bonuses before July 15th!FREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here → Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, we’re taking a deep dive into the first chapter of A Discovery of Witches by Deborah Harkness. Join me and fellow developmental editor Abigail K. Perry as we talk through the first chapter of this popular fantasy novel. Here’s a preview of what we talk about: [08:20] A very quick summary of the first chapter  [21:00] A micro-analysis of the first chapter to see how many scenes are present within the opening chapter—as well as how and why the scenes work [34:00] Our thoughts on how the opening chapter gives readers plenty of clues re: what this story is going to be about (and how it plays on the global stakes) [47:00] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Doors to my Notes to Novel course are officially OPEN! Click here to learn more and enroll before doors close on Wednesday, June 28th at 11:59 PST!Want to join our book club? Click here to learn more!Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry. Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, I’m sharing my top 5 worldbuilding tips for science fiction and fantasy writers, with examples from popular novels. Here's a preview of what's included in the episode: [02:39] Tip #1—Go narrow and deep in your worldbuilding, not wide and shallow. Pick 2-3 worldbuilding categories to focus on, and only flesh out whatever's relevant to your plot and/or characters. [05:43] Tip #2—Determine what kind of magic or technology will exist in your story world. Will your magic/tech be used to create and solve problems (hard magic/tech)? Or will it be a bit more nebulous (soft magic/tech)? [09:20] Tip #3—Avoid generalizations when it comes to the people or creatures who populate your story world. Real people have their own unique worldviews, beliefs, fears, and dreams. So should your population! [11:21] Tip #4—Your story world needs its own internal logic—for every cause, there’s an effect; for every action, there’s a reaction. Whatever you change in your world, consider the ramifications to build your internal logic. [12:33] Tip #5—Use your target audience’s age range to help inform your story’s learning curve. In general, middle-grade stories will have a more shallow learning curve whereas adult stories will have a steeper one. [14:56] Final thoughts and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Doors to my Notes to Novel course are officially OPEN! Click here to learn more and enroll before this enrollment period closes on Wednesday, June 28th at 11:59 PST!Ep. 95 - How to Start Writing Your Sci-Fi or Fantasy NovelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing my top five tips to help you get started with your science fiction or fantasy novel. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [00:00] Step 1: Decide what kind of fantasy or science fiction story you’re writing. Find both the commercial genre and content genre of your story. [00:00] Step 2: Determine what your protagonist wants and needs. Look to your content genre for guidance, and then make your answer specific to your story idea [00:00] Step 3: Figure out what kind of conflict your protagonist will face as they pursue their goal. Consider both the external and internal conflict. [00:00] Step 4: Flesh out your story world. Where and when does your story take place? Focus on a few areas to go deep in—and don’t worry about figuring everything out! [00:00] Step 5: Summarize the beginning, middle, and end of your story. Write a 1-2 sentence logline and a 2-3 paragraph synopsis that focuses on the primary storyline [00:00] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 2 - How to Choose the Right Genre For Your StoryEp. 7 - 5 Questions to Help You Write Better CharactersEp. 14 - How to Handle Character Backstory in Your NovelWant to get on the waitlist for my Notes to Novel course? Click here to sign up—doors are opening up again very soon and there will be an early bird discount, but only if you’re on the waitlist! FREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here → Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, we’re going to talk about writing interiority—aka how to reveal your character’s inner life on the page. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [03:20] What is interiority? Interiority is on-the-page access to a protagonist’s psyche as they process information in an interesting way. [06:15] What is the primary purpose of interiority? Interiority helps readers connect with your characters by exposing their inner life (plus so much more!). [08:20] An example of what interiority looks like from a real-life published novel (and two questions to help you determine if a passage is interiority or not). [11:00] 10 questions to help you ground yourself in your point of view character’s perspective (and write better interiority in your scenes) [14:20] Final thoughts and episode recap  Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 82 - Show, Don't Tell: What This Advice Really MeansEp. 7 - 5 Questions to Help You Write Better Characters FREE RESOURCE: Need help getting started with your story? This workbook will help you flesh out the foundational elements of your story so you can start writing with confidence and ease. Get your free copy here → Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, we’re taking a deep dive into the first chapter of Legendborn by Tracey Deonn. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we talk through the first chapter of this popular YA fantasy novel. Here’s a preview of what we talk about: [03:25] A very quick summary of the first chapter [05:00] A microanalysis of the two scenes within the first chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [18:25] Our thoughts on prologues [20:00] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Want to join our book club? Click here to learn more!Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry. Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, we’re going to look at the five functions of dialogue in your story. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [03:50] Function #1: Dialogue can help you advance the plot [05:50] Function #2: Dialogue can help you reveal character [08:30] Function #3: Dialogue can help you establish context [12:40] Function #4: Dialogue can help you set the tone and mood [15:45] Function #5: Dialogue can help you reveal or hint at your theme [17:40] Key points and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sitting down with Jamie Varon to talk through her incredibly inspiring story of how she went from writing the first draft of her novel to landing her dream agent. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [04:15] A quick introduction to Jamie Varon (including a timeline of her writing, editing, and publishing journey) as well as a summary of her novel, Main Character Energy [17:45] Jamie describes what it’s like working with her agent—including what it’s like receiving feedback and collaborating with her on changes to the manuscript [30:00] Jamie talks about what it was like to hear some really tough feedback from her literary agent—and how this feedback led Jamie to seek representation elsewhere. Spoiler alert: she ended up landing her dream agent shortly after! [59:30] What it’s like working with a screenwriter to turn her memoir/self-help book, Radically Content, into a movie (plus, our final thoughts on writing) Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Jamie Varon’s websiteJamie Varon on InstagramMain Character Energy by Jamie Varon (out September 2023)Radically Content by Jamie VaronRadically Content (The Journal) by Jamie VaronRoot Literary Agency Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m going to walk you through how to choose the best point of view and tense for your story. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:35] Point of view is the lens through which your story is told. It’s whose eyes the reader will experience your story through. [01:56] In first person point of view, your protagonist is the narrator. They’re telling the story in their own words, from their own perspective, and filtering things through their own worldview and biases. [04:50] In second person point of view, the writer makes the reader the protagonist in the story, speaking directly to “you” as the story unfolds. [06:03] In third person omniscient point of view, the story is told from a god-like, all knowing perspective, by a narrator who doesn’t have a role in the story. [09:20] In third person limited point of view, the story is told from a distance following the perspective of one POV character per scene. It’s similar to first person POV, but told from a bit more of a distance. [13:30] If you’re writing from multiple perspectives, make sure they’re connected in some way. They can be in a relationship together, have their fates tied together, or face a common form of conflict. [16:39] Key points and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: FREE WORKBOOK: Grab my brand-new, multi-page Story Starter Kit that will walk you through five key questions to answer before you start writing.  Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, I’m sitting down with Pauline Yates to talk through how she used short stories to hone her craft and publish her debut novel. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [03:05] An introduction to Pauline Yates and her story, Memories Don’t Lie. [03:55] How she used short stories to hone her craft and practice submitting her work to publishers (and spoiler alert: she’s now published many of her short stories!) [13:45] Pauline’s take on what it was like to work with me (and how there was one little thing I kept harping on—if you know me, you know it was scene structure) [18:40] How she develops her characters and “spends time” with them until she knows exactly what they’d do and how they’d behave in any given scenario [24:55] The aspect of writing Pauline struggles with the most—and spoiler alert: it’s worldbuilding—plus, what’s she learned about worldbuilding during revisions [37:25] A behind-the-scenes look at her experience querying over 30 agents before finally finding her dream publisher in her own (Australian) backyard [50:25] Final words of wisdom and advice from Pauline Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Visit Pauline’s website herePauline’s debut novel, Memories Don’t Lie on AmazonRead Pauline’s short story, The Secret Keepers, in this edition of Metaphosis MagazineCheck out other books published by Black Hare PressWant to learn more about my Notes to Novel course? Click here to sign up for my FREE TRAINING: The 5 Little-Known Mistakes Most Writers Make (& What to Do Instead)Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m talking about how perfectionism is really just another form of procrastination. I also share some words of wisdom to help you get back on track and moving forward with your writing again. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [02:20] My two cents on how perfectionism and procrastination are linked and what to do if you find yourself stuck in a neverending loop of procrastination [05:25] A recent story about how I did an imperfect presentation (and got called out on it)—and how this relates back to your own writing journey [09:40] A mindset shift that will help you say goodbye to perfectionism and procrastination once and for all—trust me, you’re going to love this! Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode! Grab your FREE Story Starter Kit here!Seth Godin’s video Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, we’re taking a deep dive into the first chapter of The Invisible Life of Addie LaRue by V.E. Schwab. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we talk through the first chapter of this popular fantasy novel. Here’s a preview of what we talk about: [03:45] A very quick summary of the first chapter [16:45] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [26:55] A micro analysis of the scene within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [38:05] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Want to join our book club? Click here to learn more!Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry. Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m taking you behind-the-scenes with me throughout my entire week, and I’m going to share what I’m working on, what big projects I’m focused on right now, and basically, anything that happens during the week.  I'm always curious as to how people set up their day and what they're working on and how they choose what they're going to actually work on that week. So, I thought you might be curious to know what I do all day as an editor and book coach—what I focus on and how I navigate through many, many, many action items. So, that’s what this episode is all about. I hope you enjoy this peek behind-the-scenes! Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Looking for more info about how to enroll in my Notes to Novel course? Sign up for my FREE masterclass, The 5 Mistakes Most Fiction Writers Make (and What To Do Instead) to learn more!Want to join our book club? Click here to learn more! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, I’m sitting down with Jennifer Lauer to talk through how she overcame her fear of the blank page and indie published her debut novel. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [03:00] An introduction to Jennifer Lauer and her story, The Girl in the Zoo [09:30] What the beginning of the writing process looked like for Jennifer—and when she finally realized that her fear of the blank page was preventing her from writing [14:45] What happened when Jennifer finished the first draft of her book (and changed her genre from love to action) [26:00] Jennifer’s experience entering a Twitter pitch contest—and how it gave her the courage to submit her pages for a critique on TSNOTYAW podcast [30:35] Why Jennifer ultimately decided to indie publish her novel (even after getting a positive response from a few industry professionals) [43:35] The 3 biggest lessons Jennifer learned from this experience (and the advice she’d give to her past self when embarking on this writing journey) [47:00] Final words of wisdom and advice from Jennifer Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Links mentioned in this episode: Visit Jennifer’s website or follow her on Instagram @jenniferleelauerJennifer’s debut novel, The Girl in the Zoo on AmazonJennifer’s fiction podcast The Strange Chronicles The Spun Yarn Beta Reader ServiceThe Shit No One Tells You About Writing PodcastDyna Kau (cover designer) and Barbie at Monocle EditingJoanna Penn’s websiteJane Friedman’s websiteWant to learn more about my Notes to Novel course? Click here to sign up for my FREE TRAINING: The 5 Little-Known Mistakes Most Writers Make (& What to Do Instead) Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m covering the key scenes that every status story needs. I’ve also included examples of how they show up in the movie The Devil Wears Prada. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:40] Status stories center around the protagonist’s inner need for respect that manifests as a specific desire to achieve or accomplish something in the external world. [02:40] Readers of status stories want to feel hopeful that the protagonist will succeed. They want to read about someone who works hard to improve their situation–and they want to feel a sense of triumph when that person succeeds. [04:20] 1- The protagonist becomes aware of an opportunity to rise in position. [05:07] 2- The protagonist commits to pursuing this new opportunity, leaving their comfort zone or current circumstances to go after it. [05:55] 3- The protagonist sees the true nature of the antagonist and/or learns what the antagonist wants and why. [07:00] 4- The protagonist reaches an all-is-lost moment where the antagonist or rival takes the lead and/or destroys the protagonist’s chance at getting what they want.  [08:00] 5- The protagonist faces the antagonist, and either gets what they want or redefines their definition of success to get what they need. [09:05] 6- The protagonist is rewarded externally, internally, or both. [09:50] Key points and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Episode Freebie: Status Genre Conventions PDF Cheat SheetClick here to take the Fiction Writing Made Easier quiz to get your personalized podcast playlist!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's extra special bonus episode, I'm going to answer some questions from my listeners! Here's a quick overview of what we talk about in this episode: [01:15] Ame says, “Would you be able to talk more about the coming of age genre, specifically how to develop a good plot and the aim of the book?” [02:50] Emme says, “I have a really compelling story idea, characters, and full outline that I'm really excited about, but I'm not confident in my writing and abilities to bring it to life. What should I do?” [05:25] Ben says, “I have a story that fits both the thriller and the horror conventions. Is that possible or would I need to include the conventions for both or just try to pick the one that best fits?” [06:30] Chris says, “I am completely new to writing fiction. How "rough" can I make my first draft? The sage advice seems to be that the first draft should trump all story construction and prose activities, but I am wondering how "good" does it need to be?" [09:05] Shamsee says, “Do you have any information (like the key scenes and conventions) on the fairy tale genre?” Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to take the Fiction Writing Made Easier quiz to get your personalized podcast playlist!Ep. 1 - The #1 Myth That Holds Writers BackEp. 2 - How to Choose the Right Genre for Your StoryEp. 35 - 3 Reasons You're Not WritingEp. 39 - The #1 Reason So Many Novels Go UnfinishedEp. 45 - How to Say Goodbye to Imposter Syndrom Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, we’re going to talk through the different types of editors you might need to work with to get your book ready to publish. Here's a preview of what's included:  [01:40] A developmental editor is someone who is concerned with the overall content and structure of your manuscript, and whether or not your story “works.” They focus on things like character development, story structure, plot, genre, theme, and point of view. [05:32] A line editor is someone who focuses on the way you use language to communicate your story to readers. They help you make sure the voice and style of writing are consistent, too. [06:40] A copy editor is someone who focuses on spelling, grammar, and punctuation. They will address commonly confused words (for example, affect vs. effect) as well as ensure consistency with capitalization, hyphenation, and numerals.  [07:45] A brief description of some other editing roles including acquisition editors, beta readers, and proofreaders (plus, when you might work with them). [09:15] Some things to consider when searching for an editor to work with—including a list of questions you can ask to help you find the right editor for your book. [11:55] Key points and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to take the Fiction Writing Made Easier quiz to get your personalized podcast playlist!Ep. 73 - The Four Phases of Editing a NovelSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing what the advice to “show, don’t tell” really means (and spoiler alert: it’s probably not what you think!). We’ll also talk about how to reveal your character’s emotions on the page, too. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [01:20] In general, the advice to “show, don’t tell” means that a writer should relate information to readers through sensory details and actions rather than exposition. [03:39] But there’s more to it than that. To me, “show, don’t tell,” means that you need to show your character’s emotional reaction to what’s happening in a scene—and there are three main ways to do this. [03:56] Method #1: You can tell readers what your character is feeling. [04:35] Method #2: You can show emotions via body language or physical tells. [06:14] Method #3: You can show readers what your character is thinking in response to what’s happening in a scene. [12:15] Final thoughts and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 2 - How to Choose the Right Genre for Your StoryWant to learn more about the Notes to Novel course? Click here to sign up for my FREE masterclass, The 5 Little Known Mistakes Most Writers Make (and What To Do Instead) for more info >>Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, we’re taking a deep dive into the first chapter of Ugly Love by Colleen Hoover. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we talk through this popular contemporary romance. Here’s a preview of what we talk about: [03:30] A very quick summary of the first chapter [05:30] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [28:15] A micro analysis of the scene within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [55:15] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Want to join our book club? Click here to learn more!Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry. Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I asked five of my Notes to Novel students to share their biggest lessons learned while working through their first drafts. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [02:00] Kelsey Evans on how understanding her genre’s framework made the biggest difference in her ability to finally finish her first draft [06:35] Stefanie Medrek and her favorite advice for battling writer’s block [11:00] Angela Haas on the popular writing advice to “show, don’t tell”  [16:00] Bree Cox on how she used her outline to test out ideas before writing [20:30] Kara Kentley on the importance of having a writing community [28:20] Casey Drillette on how she embraced the outlining process (as a pantser!) Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Follow Kelsey Evans on Twitter @kelseyevans or visit her website hereFollow Stefanie Medrek on Instagram @medrekwrites or visit her website here.Follow Angela Haas on Facebook or visit her website hereFollow Bree Cox on Instagram @breeacox or visit her website hereFollow Kara Kentley on Instagram, Tik Tok, or Twitter @karakentley or visit her website hereFollow Casey Drillette on Instagram @caseydrilletteMy FREE training—The 5 Little Known Mistakes Most Fiction Writers Make (and What To Do Instead). Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m going to share the three things to focus on if you’re a brand new writer—or if I was coaching someone who was brand new to writing. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [02:17] Getting your mindset right is super important! Don’t expect to write the perfect first draft. Instead, consider your first draft the “discovery draft” and have fun with it! [04:50] Figure out your story’s content genre so that you have a roadmap to follow. Your content genre can tell you all kinds of things, from the types of characters you’ll need, some of the key scenes readers expect to see, and more. [07:25] Learn how to write a solid scene. If you can write a scene that works, you can definitely write a story that works! Practice on your own work-in-progress scenes AND break down the structure of scenes in published novels, too. [09:55] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: FREE TRAINING: The 5 Little Known Mistakes Most Fiction Writers Make (and What to Do Instead). Click here to register for free!Ep. 2 - Genre: The Key to Writing a Story That WorksEp. 40 - How to Write a Well-Structured SceneEp. 6 - 3 Reasons You Should Write in Scenes vs. ChaptersEp. 9 - Value Shifts: How to Determine if Your Scenes WorkEp. 43 - 10 Tips for Writing Better Scenes Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, I'm doing a little countdown of some of the best and most listened-to clips from the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast in 2022. Here's a preview of what you'll hear in the episode: [01:40] Tip #10: Test out your idea by writing a 1-2 sentence summary of your entire story, focusing on the main story thread. [04:15] Tip #9: Create a scene-by-scene roadmap for your entire story (and then pressure-test it!) before you start writing. [07:10] Tip #8: Write (and edit) your story in scenes, not chapters! This will help you stay on track and produce a well-paced story. [10:40] Tip #7: Not everything that happens in a story needs to be dramatized in a full-blown scene. Sometimes, you can summarize! [13:05] Tip #6: Establish your character’s mental and emotional state at the very beginning of each one of your scenes. [16:45] Tip #5: When you finish writing a first draft, the very first thing you should do is take a break! [19:50] Tip #4: Make sure something meaningful happens in your opening pages if you want to catch the reader’s attention! [22:35] Tip #3: If you want to hook an agent’s attention with your query letter, don’t be vague when summarizing your story–be specific! [25:15] Tip #2: If you want to get a traditional publishing deal, consider self-publishing (first) to gain experience and grow your audience. [26:55] Tip #1: Don’t assume a traditional publisher will provide significant marketing help if you get a book deal. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to learn more about the First 5 Pages Workshop!Ep. 54 - How to Test Your Story Idea Before WritingEp. 55 - 3 Tips for Writing a First Draft in 90 DaysEp. 56 - 5 Reasons Why Readers Stop ReadingEp. 58 - 10 Querying Mistakes (and How to Avoid Them)Ep. 61 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter and the Prisoner of AzkabanEp. 63 - Don’t Start a Scene Without These 3 ThingsEp. 66 - The Pros and Cons of Traditional PublishingEp. 67 - The Pros and Cons of Indie PublishingEp. 73 - The 4 PhSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m sharing some of the key takeaways I learned from coaching writers in 2022. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [01:30] Takeaway #1: Don’t be afraid to try new things! Plus, the story of how two different writers tried something new—and had surprisingly good results. [05:10] Takeaway #2: Writing interiority is hard for almost every writer. And in my opinion, it’s not talked about enough. This is something every writer should study more! [08:10] Takeaway #3: Sometimes fast drafting is the key to success. Plus, how one writer moved through planning and outlining her story quickly, despite the discomfort. [11:35] Takeaway #4: Don’t be so precious about the beginning of your first draft. Plus, a tip for what to do if you feel stuck on your opening scenes or pages. [14:05] Takeaway #5: Trust the process! The ‘a-ha’ moments always come. How one writer was finally able to see the big picture of her story—but how it took getting all the way to ‘The End’ to do so. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 71 - Student Spotlight: How She Wrote a Novel in 6 Months (and Landed an Agent 10 Months Later) with Stefanie MedrekEp. 76 - Student Spotlight: The Power of Outlining (and How He Finished a First Draft in 3 Months) With James BeswickGet on the Notes to Novel Waitlist! Doors open again on January 9th!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, I’m sitting down with James Beswick to talk through his incredibly inspiring story of how he finished his first draft in three months. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [03:30] An introduction to James Beswick and how he decided to write a book [05:30] How James carved out writing time in his calendar, while working a full time job [06:30] What James’s Notes to Novel experience was like—and why he decided to enroll in the course in the first place [08:25] How James initially wanted to write a screenplay, but then decided to write a novel instead (Plus, our thoughts on writing a novel vs. writing a screenplay) [11:00] How your genre framework removes the terror and overwhelm from the writing process (and pulls back the curtain on how to actually write a novel) [13:30] A quick description of James’s story [14:45] What is was like for James to create an outline—and the three things that helped him outline his story the most [16:30] The secret to avoiding writing problematic scenes where nothing happens [18:45] My feedback on James’s outline (the 3 main issues he had + what worked) [21:45] James’s big a-ha moment re: writing the perfect first draft (and the mindset shift that got him through writing a messy first draft) [24:30] Why James decided to get outside feedback from an editor once he had a finished draft (and what this process was like) [27:00] Our thoughts on the hardest section of the story to write [29:00] What it was like for James to get feedback on his first draft—and what some of the biggest issues were in terms of plot and character [36:00] An update on how the second draft is going for James (and how he’s using his outline to help him navigate the revision process) [46:00] Final words of wisdom and advice from James Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too! Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Follow James Beswick on Twitter!Interested in the Notes to Novel course? Click here to get on the waitlist. Doors will re-open in early January, and you'll be the first to know!Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, I’m covering the conventions of the crime genre. This includes the character roles, settings, and events that need to be present in a crime story in order for it to work and satisfy fans of the genre. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [01:30] Crime stories are all about the quest to either solve or commit a crime. So, these stories start with a crime, build with an investigation (or a completion of the crime), and end with identifying and bringing the criminal to justice (or not). [05:15] 1. There’s a crime with at least one victim that launches the investigation. [06:15] 2. The protagonist is intelligent and determined to solve the crime.  [08:15] 3. There’s an equally smart or crafty antagonist who seems to be a step ahead of the protagonist the whole time. [09:15] 4. There is a closed circle of suspects, each with a credible motive and a reasonable opportunity to commit the crime. [10:30] 5. There’s a MacGuffin (or a very specific thing the antagonist wants). [11:30] 6. A sidekick character who acts as a sounding board for the protagonist. [12:25] 7. There are clues and red herrings that help (or hurt) the investigation. [13:40] 8. There’s a ticking clock by which the protagonist must solve the crime. [14:37] 9. There’s a speech in praise of the antagonist that shows their brilliance. [15:48] 10. There’s at least one shapeshifter character. [16:42] Key points and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Episode Freebie: Crime Genre Cheat SheetThe 6 Key Scenes Every Crime Story Needs (article)What are Obligatory Scenes and Conventions? (article)Understanding Genre: How to Write Better Stories (article)Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, I’m covering the difference between writing in scene versus writing in summary. Here’s a preview of what’s included: [01:45] Scenes are concrete moments that unfold in real time. Readers “watch” the characters move across the setting, interact with other characters or the setting, and speak as if everything’s taking place in the real world, in real time. [02:55] Summaries happen over a condensed period of time (days, months, years, etc.). They convey ideas, concepts, and information rather than create specific experiences that a character (and readers) are “living through” in that moment. [04:20] An example from Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone by J.K. Rowling [07:30] An example from Sharp Objects by Gillian Flynn (trigger warning: a dead body) [10:55] Top 3 guidelines for when you should write in scene [12:20] Top three guidelines for when you should write in summary [16:15] Do not get hung up on this when writing your first draft! Your main job when writing a first draft is to get to THE END–worry about scene vs. summary later. [16:45] Key points and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 40 - How to Write a Well-Structured Scene (article)How to Write Better Scenes (workshop)Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, we’re going to talk about how to edit your messy first draft without slipping into overwhelm. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [01:50] The very first thing you should do when you finish a first draft  [04:15] A quick overview of the four editing phases, and how breaking your edits down into these phases will help you reduce overwhelm. [05:45] Phase 1: The “Story Level” edit [09:25] Phase 2: The “Scene Level edit” [13:35] How your editing plan might change depending on your publishing goals [14:30] Phase 3: The “Page Level edit” [16:20] Phase 4: The “Sentence Level edit” [19:35] My answer to writers who ask me, “Can I do these phases out of order?” (spoiler alert: my answer is almost always no) [20:00] FAQ: Is there a way to go through all four phases faster? [20:45] Key points and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Episode Freebie: Your Next Steps DIY Editing ChecklistThe Spun Yarn Beta Reading ServiceProWritingAidHemingway EditorGrammarlyGrammar Girl’s Quick and Dirty TipsSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, I’m covering the key scenes that every morality story needs. I’ve also included examples of how they show up in the movie Flight. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [01:45] Morality stories center around a protagonist with a moral compass that’s about to change, for better or for worse. They’re either seeking redemption from past mistakes or they want to silence their inner conscience so they can keep doing selfish things. [03:00] Readers choose these types of stories because they want to see what another person will do when given the choice to act selfishly or altruistically. Will they make the “right” choice? Or the “wrong” one? [05:15] Key Scene #1: The protagonist faces an opportunity or challenge to be selfless [06:05] Key Scene #2: The protagonist commits to doing nothing about the greater need (and may even move in the opposite direction) [07:30] Key Scene #3: The protagonist learns what the antagonist wants and why, and the greater external need is starting to become uncomfortable [08:40] Key Scene #4: The protagonist reaches an all-is-lost moment where it seems like their selfish ways will no longer work [09:35] Key Scene #5: The protagonist either sacrifices something in service of an individual, or they decide once and for all to maintain their selfish way of being [11:00] Key Scene #6: The protagonist is either rewarded with forgiveness, or they’re punished for sticking to their selfish ways [12:15] Key points and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Episode Freebie: Morality Genre Cheat SheetEp. 2 - How to Choose the Right Genre for Your Story (article)What are Obligatory Scenes and Conventions? (article)Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, I’m sitting down with Stefanie Medrek to talk through her incredibly inspiring story of how she went from having an idea for a story to landing an agent. Here’s a preview of what’s included:  [05:00] The exact moment Stefanie had the idea for her story—and how she just knew it wouldn’t let her go until she put pen to paper [08:00] A quick description of Stefanie’s story [09:35] Stefanie’s initial reaction to my advice to throw out all 40,000 of the words she had written, and what happened when she did [12:00] A few of the key takeaways Stefanie learned from re-writing her first draft [15:00] What the editing process was like (and how long it took) [17:35] How and when Stefanie knew she was ready to start querying [19:00] Stefanie’s reaction to getting a heart on her #PitMad pitch (IYKYK) [22:30] The moment Stefanie almost gave up on writing… and then got a call from her (now) agent an hour later [25:00] How having a fleshed out outline helped Stefanie avoid spiraling into overwhelm [27:00] What happened when Stefanie got the offer of representation [28:00] What it was like to get feedback (and suggested changes) from her agent [30:00] A quick look into what writing book two looks like [34:00] Stefanie’s thoughts on 1:1 coaching vs. the Notes to Novel course [38:00] Final words of wisdom and advice from Stefanie Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Stefanie Medrek’s websiteFollow Stefanie on InstagramThe doors to my Notes to Novel course are closing for the rest of 2022 very soon! If you want my proven roadmap for writing a first draft that works, click here to enroll so that you can get started today!Click here to sign up for my FREE TRAINING: The 5 Little-Known Mistakes Most Writers Make (& What to Do Instead)Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, I'm going to walk you through the conventions of the status genre. I'm also going to show you how these conventions show up in the movie The Devil Wears Prada. Here's a preview of what's included: [01:45] Status stories center around the protagonist’s inner need for respect that manifests as a specific desire to achieve or accomplish something in the external world. [02:55] Readers of status stories want to feel hopeful that the protagonist will succeed. They want to read about someone who works hard to improve their situation–and they want to feel a sense of triumph when that person succeeds. [05:15] 1- The protagonist wants to gain respect, but what they need is self-esteem. [06:05] 2- The antagonist opposes the protagonist and threatens their position. [07:00] 3- There is a clear (and specific) definition of what it means to be successful. [08:15] 4- The setting is public; people will witness the protagonist's success or failure. [09:10] 5- At least one social problem or moral challenge for the protagonist to face. [10:05] 6- At least one foil character who demonstrates a different path to success. [10:40] 7- At least one mentor figure who guides the protagonist, for better or for worse. [11:35] 8- At least one shapeshifter character who hinders the protagonist’s progress. [12:15] 9- The protagonist must overcome an inner obstacle related to success. [13:25] 10- The ending of a status story is usually bittersweet. [14:30] Key points and episode recap. Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Episode Freebie: Status Genre Conventions PDF Cheat SheetConventions vs. tropes: What's the difference? (podcast and article) Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, we're taking a deep dive into the first chapter of Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows by J.K. Rowling. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we nerd out about the seventh book in the Harry Potter series. Here’s a preview of what we talk about: [07:45] A very quick summary of the first chapter [11:40] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [43:30] A micro analysis of the two scenes within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [54:00] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.Ep. 59 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Sorcerer's StoneEp. 60 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Chamber of SecretsEp. 61 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Prisoner of AzkabanEp. 64 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Goblet of FireEp. 66 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Order of the PhoenixEp. 69 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Half Blood PrinceClick here to join our book club! Book Notes is a virtual book club for writers who want to read good books and then deconstruct them to figure out how and why they work. First up: UGLY LOVE by Colleen Hoover! Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, we're taking a deep dive into the first chapter of Harry Potter and the Half Blood Prince by J.K. Rowling. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we nerd out about the sixth book in the Harry Potter series–here’s a preview of what we talk about: [05:45] A very quick summary of the first chapter [07:15] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [13:45] A micro analysis of the two scenes within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [57:25] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be  adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.Ep. 59 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Sorcerer's StoneEp. 60 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Chamber of SecretsEp. 61 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Prisoner of AzkabanEp. 64 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Goblet of FireEp. 66 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Order of the PhoenixWorkshop: How to Write Compelling and Well-Structured Scenes Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m going to walk you through the pros and cons of indie publishing. Here’s a preview of what you’ll hear in the episode: [01:30] Indie publishing is the pure do-it-yourself publishing path. It's where you, the author, take on ALL the roles of and basically become the publisher of your own book. [02:30] The pros of indie publishing [08:20] The cons of indie publishing [13:20] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Episode Freebie: How to Pick Your Publishing Path WorksheetEp. 66 - The Pros and Cons of Traditional PublishingThe Alliance of Independent Authors (ALLi)ALLi’s resource that’s all about choosing a self-publishing service that’s written by authors and full of unbiased advice.Indie Publishing Resources: IngramSpark and CreatespaceJane Friedman’s downloadable publishing chart that gives a wider look at the different publishing options available. Writer Beware has a lot of information about scams against authors and companies to watch out for. Preditors and Editors, which is a watchdog site for authors with listings of which publishers are recommended and which are scams. Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s episode, I’m going to walk you through the pros and cons of traditional publishing. Here’s a preview of what you’ll hear in the episode: [01:35] Traditional publishing refers to the established system of submitting a finished manuscript to agents with the goal of getting a book deal with one of the Big Five publishers. [03:00] The pros of traditional publishing [08:45] The cons of traditional publishing [15:20] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Episode Freebie: How to Pick Your Publishing Path WorksheetIndie Publishing Resources: IngramSpark and CreatespaceJane Friedman’s downloadable publishing chart that gives a wider look at the different publishing options available. Writer Beware has a lot of information about scams against authors and companies to watch out for. Preditors and Editors, which is a watchdog site for authors with listings of which publishers are recommended and which are scams. Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, we're taking a deep dive into the first chapter of Harry Potter and the Order of the Phoenix by J.K. Rowling. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we nerd out about the fifth book in the Harry Potter series! [03:40] A very quick summary of the first chapter [06:25] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [25:00] A micro analysis of the two scenes within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [57:00] Final thoughts and episode recap Rate + Review + Follow on Apple Podcasts "I love the Fiction Writing Made Easy podcast!" ← If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing this show! Your rating and review will help other writers find this podcast, and they're also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here, scroll all the way to the bottom, tap five stars to rate the show, and then select "Write a Review." Be sure to let me know what your favorite part of the episode was, too!  Also, if you haven't done so already, make sure you're following the podcast! I'll be adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you're not following the show, there's a good chance you'll miss them. Click here to follow now! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website or on Instagram @abigailkperry.Ep. 59 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Sorcerer's StoneEp. 60 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Chamber of SecretsEp. 61 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Prisoner of AzkabanEp. 64 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Goblet of FireWorkshop: How to Write Compelling and Well-Structured ScenesSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, we're taking a deep dive into the first chapter of Harry Potter and the Goblet of Fire by J.K. Rowling. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we nerd out about the fourth book in the Harry Potter series: [03:05] A very quick summary of the first chapter [05:50] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [20:30] A micro analysis of the two scenes within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [38:50] Final thoughts and episode recap Subscribe & Review in Apple Podcasts Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode! Especially because I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix, and if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. So, click here to subscribe to the show on Apple Podcasts! If you're already a subscriber, and if you enjoy the show, I would be really grateful if you left a review over on Apple Podcasts, too. Those reviews help other writers find my podcast, and they’re also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review,” and let me know what your favorite part of the show is. Thanks in advance! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website (www.abigailkperry.com) or you can find her on Instagram @abigailkperry.Ep. 59 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Sorcerer's StoneEp. 60 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Chamber of SecretsEp. 61 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Prisoner of AzkabanWorkshop: How to Write Compelling and Well-Structured Scenes Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, I'm sharing the three contextual elements you'll want to include at the beginning of each one of your scenes. We'll also look at how these three elements show up in the opening of a scene from the novel An Ember in the Ashes by Sabaa Tahir. Here's a preview of the key points: [03:10] Key element #1: Where and when is this scene taking place? [04:35] Key element #2: What is your POV character's mental and emotional state? [08:55] Key element #3: What is your POV character's goal and motivation? [17:35] Final thoughts and episode recap Subscribe & Review in Apple Podcasts Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode! Especially because I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix, and if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. So, click here to subscribe to the show on Apple Podcasts! If you're already a subscriber, and if you enjoy the show, I would be really grateful if you left a review over on Apple Podcasts, too. Those reviews help other writers find my podcast, and they’re also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review,” and let me know what your favorite part of the show is. Thanks in advance! Links mentioned in this episode: Ep. 40 - How to Write a Well-Structured SceneBook: An Ember in the Ashes by Sabaa TahirSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, we're going to talk about the key scenes that every crime story needs to have in order to work and to satisfy fans of the genre. Here's a preview of what's included: [01:15] Crime stories are all about the quest to either solve or commit a crime. So, these stories start with a crime, build with an investigation (or a completion of the crime), and end with identifying and bringing the criminal to justice (or not). [02:15] Readers choose crime fiction because they want to follow the trail of clues, make meaning of those clues, and figure out the puzzle right alongside the protagonist. They want to see the wrongs righted, and they want to see justice prevail. [03:05] Obligatory scenes are the key events, decisions, and discoveries that move a protagonist along their journey from point A to point B. They help us writers craft a story that works AND a story that will deliver a specific emotional experience. [04:35] Key scene #1: The protagonist discovers a crime that’s indicative of a master antagonist. [05:55] Key scene #2: The stakes become personal to the protagonist, and they commit to figuring out what’s going on so they can bring the antagonist to justice. [07:10] Key scene #3: The protagonist learns more about what the antagonist wants and why. This raises the stakes, and the clock starts ticking. [08:40] Key scene #4: The protagonist reaches an all-is-lost moment where they realize they’ve come to the wrong conclusion or they’ve been pursuing the wrong person. [10:05] Key scene #5: The protagonist exposes the true criminal in the big climactic moment and unravels all the antagonist’s motives and plans. [11:40] Key scene #6: The protagonist brings the antagonist to justice (or not). [12:55] Key points and episode recap. Subscribe & Review in Apple Podcasts Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode! Especially because I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix, and if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. So, click here to subscribe to the show on Apple Podcasts! If you're already a subscriber, and if you enjoy the show, I would be really grateful if you left a review over on Apple Podcasts, too. Those reviews help other writers find my podcast, and they’re also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review,” and let me know what your favorite part of the show is. Thanks in advance! Links mentioned in this episode: Episode Freebie: Crime Genre Key Scenes PDF Cheat SheetSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, we're taking a deep dive into the first chapter of Harry Potter and the Prisoner of Azkaban by J.K. Rowling. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we nerd out about the third book in the Harry Potter series: [03:00] A very quick summary of the first chapter [04:50] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [21:00] A micro analysis of the two scenes within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [40:00] Final thoughts and episode recap Follow & Review in Apple Podcasts Are you following my podcast? If not, I want to encourage you to do that today so that you don't miss an episode! Especially because I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not following the show, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. So, click here to follow this show in Apple Podcasts! If you're already a follower, and if you enjoy the show, I would be really grateful if you left a review over on Apple Podcasts, too. These reviews help other writers find my podcast and they’re also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the show is. Thanks in advance! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website (www.abigailkperry.com) or you can find her on Instagram @abigailkperry.Ep. 59 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Sorcerer's StoneEp. 60 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Chamber of SecretsEp. 40 - How to Write a Well-Structured SceneWorkshop: How to Write Compelling and Well-Structured ScenesSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, we're taking a deep dive into the first chapter of Harry Potter and the Chamber of Secrets by J.K. Rowling. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we nerd out about the second book in the Harry Potter series: [03:30] A very quick summary of the first chapter [05:30] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [25:00] A micro analysis of the two scenes within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [46:00] Final thoughts and episode recap Follow & Review in Apple Podcasts Are you following my podcast? If not, I want to encourage you to do that today so that you don't miss an episode! Especially because I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not following the show, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. So, click here to follow this show in Apple Podcasts! If you're already a follower, and if you enjoy the show, I would be really grateful if you left a review over on Apple Podcasts, too. These reviews help other writers find my podcast and they’re also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the show is. Thanks in advance! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website (www.abigailkperry.com), or you can find her on Instagram @abigailkperry.Ep. 59 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Sorcerer's StoneEp. 40 - How to Write a Well-Structured SceneWorkshop: How to Write Compelling and Well-Structured ScenesSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, we're taking a deep dive into the first chapter of Harry Potter and the Sorcerer's Stone by J.K. Rowling. Join me and fellow developmental editor, Abigail Perry, as we nerd out about the first book in the Harry Potter series: [04:30] A very quick summary of the first chapter [07:00] A macro analysis of the first chapter using 7 key questions from Paula Munier's book The Writer’s Guide to Beginnings [38:00] A micro analysis of the two scenes within the chapter using the "5 Commandments of Storytelling" from The Story Grid [60:00] Final thoughts and episode recap Follow & Review in Apple Podcasts Are you following my podcast? If not, I want to encourage you to do that today so that you don't miss an episode! Especially because I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not following the show, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. So, click here to follow this show in Apple Podcasts! If you're already a follower, and if you enjoy the show, I would be really grateful if you left a review over on Apple Podcasts, too. These reviews help other writers find my podcast and they’re also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the show is. Thanks in advance! Links mentioned in this episode: Click here to check out the LitMatch Podcast with Abigail Perry! You can also get in touch with Abigail through her website (www.abigailkperry.com) or you can find her on Instagram @abigailkperry.Ep. 60 - First Chapter Analysis: Harry Potter & the Chamber of SecretsEp. 40 - How to Write a Well-Structured SceneWorkshop: How to Hook Readers in Your First 5 PagesSupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In this episode, I'm sharing the 10 most common querying mistakes I see writers make and how to avoid them. Here's a preview of what you'll hear in the episode: [02:45] Mistake #1: Your story isn't 100% ready to send out just yet. [04:25] Mistake #2: Sending your query to the wrong person. [06:15] Mistake #3: Not following the submission guidelines. [08:45] Mistake #4: You forgot to include your metadata. [09:50] Mistake #5: Your word count is too high or too low. [11:10] Mistake #6: The genre of your story isn't clear. [12:30] Mistake #7: The comp titles listed don't make sense. [14:25] Mistake #8: Your story summary is too vague. [16:35] Mistake #9: You've tried to fit too much stuff in your query. [18:55] Mistake #10: Your query letter is unprofessional or weird. [21:00] Final thoughts and episode recap Follow & Review in Apple Podcasts Are you following my podcast? If not, I want to encourage you to do that today so that you don't miss an episode! Especially because I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not following the show, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. So, click here to follow this show in Apple Podcasts! If you're already a follower, and if you enjoy the show, I would be really grateful if you left a review over on Apple Podcasts, too. These reviews help other writers find my podcast and they’re also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the show is. Thanks in advance! Links mentioned in this episode: Workshop: How to Hook Readers in Your First 5 PagesEp. 2 - How to Choose the Best Genre for Your StorySupport the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today’s extra special bonus episode, I'm sharing an interview I did earlier this year with Emma Dhesi for her Be A Bestseller Summit. We talked about genre and how your story’s genre can help you write a story that works. And specifically, we dove into the thriller genre and talked about how the key scenes and conventions of the thriller genre show up in The Silence of the Lambs. This was such a fun event to be a part of because it’s always fun to talk about writing, but also there were 25-30 other speakers who all shared their insights, tips, and strategies on the writing, editing, and publishing process., too. The event is officially over, but you want to watch a replay of all the interviews, you can click here to purchase an All-Access Pass. Enjoy! Follow & Review in Apple Podcasts Are you following my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode! Especially because I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. So, click here to subscribe to the show in Apple Podcasts! If you're already a follower, and if you enjoy the show, I would be really grateful if you left a review over on Apple Podcasts, too. Those reviews help other writers find my podcast and they’re also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the show is. Thanks in advance! Links Mentioned in this Episode: Click here to access the interviews from the Be a Bestseller 3.0 Summit hosted by Emma Dhesi. Note: There is a fee for the All-Access Pass.Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.

In today's episode, I'm going to walk you through the conventions of the action genre. I'm also going to show you how these conventions show up in the movie The Hunger Games. Here's a preview of what's included: [01:25] Action stories are about life and death, and good versus evil. They’re about a character who has to rise up, overcome great obstacles, defeat forces of evil, and maybe even save the world. But that being said, these stories aren’t always about superheroes. [02:35] Readers choose action stories to experience the excitement of the life and death stakes and situations that the protagonist is presented with. But it’s not just about that—we choose these stories because they inspire us to become the best versions of ourselves, too. [03:35] Genre conventions are the character roles, settings, and micro-events that are specific to a genre. They’re what help us writers write a story that works AND evoke emotional reactions in our readers. [04:50] #1 - The protagonist has a special talent or gift and the potential for heroism. [06:55] #2 - The protagonist’s goal is to stop the antagonist and save victims. [08:10] #3 - There are multiple lives at stake (including the protagonist’s). [09:10] #4 - The antagonist is stronger and/or more powerful than the protagonist. [10:25] #5 - The protagonist has a moral compass that the antagonist does not. [11:50] #6 - There’s a speech in praise of the antagonist. [13:00] #7 - There’s a MacGuffin (or a very specific thing the antagonist wants). [13:50] #8 - There are sidekicks who help the protagonist save the victim/s. [14:45] #9 - There’s at least one mentor figure who gives the protagonist guidance. [15:25] #10 - There’s a ticking clock that puts pressure on the protagonist. [17:05] Key points and episode recap. Follow & Review in Apple Podcasts Are you following my podcast? If not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode! Especially because I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not following the show there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. So, click here to follow the show in Apple Podcasts! If you're already a follower, and if you enjoy the show, I would be really grateful if you left a review over on Apple Podcasts, too. Those reviews help other writers find my podcast and they’re also super fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the show is. Thanks in advance! Links mentioned in this episode: Episode Freebie: Action Genre Conventions PDF Cheat SheetAction Conventions: The 10 Things Every Action Story Needs (article)Action Obligatory Scenes: The 6 Scenes Every Action Story Needs (article)Conventions vs. tropes: What's the difference? (podcast and article) Support the show 👉 Looking for a transcript? If you’re listening on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, scroll down below the episode player until you see the transcript.